advertisement
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping, and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
1
Before driving
Opening the fuel tank cap..... 99
Keys ..................................... 32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control ....... 33
Side doors ............................ 37
Back door ............................. 42
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 50
Rear seats ............................ 54
(driver’s seat) ..................... 64
Head restraints ..................... 67
Seat belts ............................. 71
Steering wheel (manually adjustable type).................. 81
(power-adjustable type)...... 82
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror.................................. 83
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 86
Roof luggage carrier............. 90
Engine immobilizer system .............................. 104
Alarm .................................. 106
2
Correct driving posture ....... 109
SRS airbags ....................... 111
Front passenger occupant classification system......... 124
Child restraint systems ....... 129
Installing child restraints ..... 133
When driving
Driving the vehicle .............. 148
Engine (ignition) switch....... 157
Automatic transmission ...... 160
Turn signal lever ................. 164
Parking brake ..................... 165
Horn .................................... 166
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows .................... 92
Power back window ............. 94
Moon roof ............................. 96
Gauges and meters ............ 167
Indicators and warning lights ................................. 172
Multi-information display ..... 177
Accessory meter ................. 183
2
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch.................. 186
Fog light switch ................... 190
Windshield wipers and washer .............................. 191
Rear window wiper and washer .............................. 193
Headlight cleaner switch ..... 194
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control...................... 195
Dynamic laser cruise control ............................... 198
Intuitive parking assist......... 209
Rear view monitor system... 216
Electronically modulated air suspension................... 223
Suspension System)......... 228
Four-wheel drive system..... 229
AUTO LSD system.............. 234
Driving assist systems ........ 236
Off-road precautions ........... 242
Cargo and luggage ............. 247
Vehicle load limits ............... 251
Winter driving tips ............... 253
Trailer towing ...................... 257
Dinghy towing ..................... 277
3
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system.............................. 280
Rear air conditioning system.............................. 288
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ......................... 292
Windshield wiper de-icer .... 294
Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ........................... 295
1
2
3
Audio system...................... 297
Using the radio ................... 301
Using the CD player ........... 309
WMA discs ....................... 318
Operating an iPod .............. 326
Optimal use of the audio system.............................. 339
Using the AUX port............. 343
Using the steering wheel audio switches.................. 345
4
5
6
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
audio system.............................. 351
® enabled portable player ... 356
® enabled portable player ... 358
audio system setup ................................ 363
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Rear seat entertainment system.............................. 364
(DVD video)...................... 372
(video CD) ........................ 381
(audio CD/CD text)........... 384
(MP3 discs) ...................... 386
Using the video mode ........ 389
Changing the Setup Menu settings............................. 391
3-5. Using the hands-free phone
4
Hands-free phone system features ............................ 399
Using the hands-free phone system.............................. 403
Making a phone call ........... 412
Setting a cellular phone...... 416
Security and system setup ................................ 420
Using the phone book ........ 423
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.................. 429
• Personal/interior light main switch 430
• Personal/interior lights ...... 431
• Interior light....................... 432
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features ....... 433
• Glove boxes ..................... 434
• Coin holder ........................ 435
• Front console box ............. 436
• Card holder....................... 438
• Map holder ....................... 439
• Pen holder ........................ 441
• Tissue pocket ................... 442
• Rear console box ............. 443
• Overhead console ............ 446
• Cup holders ...................... 448
• Bottle holders ................... 452
• Auxiliary boxes ................. 453
Sun visors........................... 455
Vanity mirrors ..................... 456
Clock................................... 457
Outside temperature display .............................. 458
Portable ashtray ................. 460
Cigarette lighter .................. 461
Conversation mirror ............ 462
Power outlets ...................... 463
Seat heaters ....................... 469
Seat heaters and ventilators ......................... 472
Armrests ............................. 474
Rear side sunshades .......... 475
Seatback table.................... 477
Floor mat ............................ 478
4
Luggage compartment features............................. 480
Garage door opener............ 485
Compass............................. 491
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............ 498
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............. 500
Maintenance requirements..................... 503
General maintenance.......... 505
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................... 508
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions ....................... 509
Hood ................................... 513
Engine compartment........... 514
Tires .................................... 529
Tire inflation pressure ......... 536
Wheels ................................ 540
Air conditioning filter............ 542
Wireless remote control battery............................... 545
Checking and replacing fuses ................................. 547
Light bulbs........................... 558
5
When trouble arises
Emergency flashers............ 572
If your vehicle needs to be towed....................... 573
If you think something is wrong ............................... 579
Fuel pump shut off system.............................. 580
Event data recorder............ 581
1
2
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds.............................. 583
If you have a flat tire ........... 597
If the engine will not start.... 608
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ................... 610
If you lose your keys........... 611
If the vehicle battery is discharged........................ 612
If your vehicle overheats .... 615
If the vehicle becomes stuck................................. 618
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .................. 619
3
4
5
6
7
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
Vehicle specifications
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 622
Fuel information ................. 635
Tire information .................. 639
Customizable features ....... 650
Items to initialize................. 654
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ................ 656
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 657
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 660
Index
Abbreviation list........................ 672
Alphabetical index .................... 674
What to do if... ........................... 684
6
7
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
Pictorial index
Exterior
Hood
Windshield wipers
Moon roof
Outside rear view mirrors
Front side marker lights
Headlights (low beam)
Fog lights
Headlights (high beam)
Front turn signal/parking lights and daytime running lights
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights
Roof luggage carrier
Fuel filler door
Side doors
Tail lights
Rear window defogger
Back window
Rear window wiper
Tires
●
Rotation
●
Replacement
●
Inflation pressure
●
Information
License plate lights
Back door
Rear turn signal lights
: If equipped
9
Pictorial index
Interior
Seat belts
Head restraints
Bottle holders
Cup holders
Front console box
Horn
SRS driver airbag
SRS front passenger airbag
Auxiliary boxes
10
Rear seats
Glove boxes
Floor mats
Front seats
SRS side airbags
Seatback table
Type A
Personal/interior lights
Rear seat entertainment system
SRS curtain shield airbags
Personal/interior lights
Personal/interior lights
Moon roof switches
Overhead console
Conversation mirror
Vanity mirrors
Interior light
Sun visors
Rear side sunshades
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Compass
Garage door opener switches
Rear view monitor system
: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Interior
Type B
Personal/interior lights
Rear seat entertainment system
SRS curtain shield airbags
Personal/interior lights
Personal/interior lights
Overhead console
Conversation mirror
Vanity mirrors
12
Interior light
Sun visors
Rear side sunshades
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Compass
Garage door opener switches
Rear view monitor system
Inside door lock button
Door lock switch
Driving position memory switches
Power window switches
Auxiliary box
Window lock switch
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Interior
Cup holders
Ashtray
14
Shift lever
Shift lock override button
Map holder
Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system
Rear air conditioning system
Power outlet
Cup holders
15
Pictorial index
Interior
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system
A/V input port
Rear air conditioning system
16
Power outlet
Cup holders
Headphone jacks
Vehicles with rear console box
Cup holders
Rear console box
Cup holders
Auxiliary box
Seat heater switches
17
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
Gauges and meters
Windshield wipers and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
18
Hood lock release lever
Parking brake pedal
Tire pressure warning reset switch
SRS knee airbags
Rear window defogger switch/
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
Windshield wiper de-icer
Accessory meter
Audio system
Navigation system
*
Security indicator
AUX port
AUX port/USB port
Cigarette lighter
Air conditioning system
Power outlet
Seat heater switches
Seat heater and ventilator switches
: If equipped
*
: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
19
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
20
Emergency flasher switch
Intuitive parking assist switch
Center differential lock switch
*
1
TOW/HAUL switch
AVS switch
Accessory meter control switches
Multi-information display control switches
*
3
Front wheel drive control switch
*
1
Coin holder
*
2
Height control switches
Power back window switch
Engine (ignition) switch
VSC OFF switch
: If equipped
*
1
: 4WD models
*
2
: 2WD models
*
3
: Vehicles with multi-information display
21
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Audio remote control switches
Talk switch
Climate remote control switches
22
Telephone switches
Distance switch
Cruise control switch
Personal/interior light main switch
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
Outside rear view mirror switches
Instrument panel light control dial
Power back door switch
REVERSE TILT switch
Headlight cleaner switch
RSCA OFF switch
*
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
: If equipped
*
: 4WD models
23
Pictorial index
Luggage compartment
Power back door switch
Shopping bag hook
Seatback folding/ returning switches
*
Power outlet
Back door strap
Child restraint anchor bracket
Shopping bag hook
24
Auxiliary box
Auxiliary box
Tie-down hooks
Cargo net hooks
Tie-down hooks
Cargo net hooks
: If equipped
*
: Vehicles with third power seats
25
For your information
Main Owners Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
26
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
27
CAUTION
■
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
28
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
29
30
Before driving
1
Keys ................................... 32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control ..... 33
Side doors.......................... 37
Back door........................... 42
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows .................. 92
Power back window ........... 94
Moon roof........................... 96
Opening the fuel tank cap ................................... 99
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats ......................... 50
Rear seats.......................... 54
(driver’s seat) ................... 64
Head restraints................... 67
Seat belts ........................... 71
Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) ............... 81
(power-adjustable type) ... 82
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ............................... 83
Outside rear view mirrors... 86
Roof luggage carrier .......... 90
Engine immobilizer system ........................... 104
Alarm................................ 106
Correct driving posture..... 109
SRS airbags..................... 111
Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 124
Child restraint systems..... 129
Installing child restraints ........................ 133
31
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
■
When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (
Carry the master key for your own use and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
■
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (
NOTICE
■
To prevent key damage
●
Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
●
Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with power back door
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Pushing and holding:
Sounds alarm
Pushing and holding:
Opens and closes the power back door
Vehicles without power back door
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Pushing and holding:
Sounds alarm
1
■
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:
Twice)
Back door: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Panic mode
When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.
■
Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■
Power back door operation (vehicles with power back door)
The power back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.
■
Wireless remote control battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the wireless remote control is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (
■
If the wireless remote control does not operate
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (
■
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■
Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.
(
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Conditions affecting operation
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.
●
Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves
●
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device
●
When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
●
When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
●
When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●
When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer
■
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a wireless remote control onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the wireless remote control while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying a wireless remote control in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the wireless remote control to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■
Customization
●
That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display)
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed.
(Customizable features
●
It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization
1
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Certification for wireless remote control
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: GQ43VT20T
Receiver: GQ4-34R
IC (Canada) IDs:
Transmitter: 1470A-1T
Receiver: 1470A-6R
MADE IN U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■
Wireless remote control
■
Key
Locks all doors
Closes the windows and moon roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key again unlocks the other doors.
Opens the front windows and moon roof (turn and hold)
■
Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
1
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Pulling the door handle can open the front door even if the lock button is in the lock position.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if a front door is open and the key is in the engine switch.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function
Shift position linked door locking function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Operation
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking function
Driver’s door linked door unlocking function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.
■
Setting and canceling the functions
Vehicles with multi-information display
Vehicles without multi-information display
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the ON position. (Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.)
1
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Shift the shift lever to P or N, press and hold the driver’s door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
Function Shift lever position
Driver’s door lock switch position
Shift position linked door locking function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Speed linked door locking function
Driver’s door linked door unlocking function
P
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.
■
When locking the doors using the key
The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.
■
Key reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.
●
Always use a seat belt.
●
Always lock the doors.
●
Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside door lock buttons are in locked position.
●
Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
1
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following procedures.
■
Locking and unlocking the back door
Key
Unlocks all doors
Opens the back window
(turn and hold)
Locks all doors
Closes the back window
(turn and hold)
Door lock switches
Wireless remote control
■
Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Back door opener
Raise the back door while pushing up the back door opener switch.
42
Wireless remote control (vehicles with power back door)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Opening the back door from inside the vehicle (vehicles with power back door)
Push and hold the switch to open/close.
1
Power back door switches (vehicles with power back door)
Push and hold the switch to close.
When the back door is not completely opened, the power back door may not close by the switch.
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.
The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Rear step bumper
For rear end protection and easier step-up loading.
To get on the rear step bumper, use the shaded area in the illustration.
■
Back door strap
Use the strap when closing.
■
The power back door can be opened when
●
The engine switch is in the ON position, and the shift lever is in P.
●
The engine switch is off or in the ACC position.
■
Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)
If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.
■
If the power back door does not work
The back door must be initialized. To initialize, close the back door completely by hand and unlock the back door.
■
Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)
In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■
Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)
While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down.
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. power back door) can be changed.
(Customizable features
1
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
●
Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
●
Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion.
●
Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■
Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
●
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door fall closed again after it is opened.
●
When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
●
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.
●
Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
●
The back door may fall if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.
●
When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
●
When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door strap is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.
●
Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■
Operating the back door
●
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to fall closed again after it is opened.
■
Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door)
●
In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.
●
Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back door system is cancelled.
■
Power back door (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
●
Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
●
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.
●
If the power back door switch is pressed while the back door is opening during automatic operation, the back door stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.
●
If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door may move abruptly.
●
On an incline, the back door may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the back door is fully open and secure.
1
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■
Power back door (if equipped)
●
In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may suddenly fall, causing an accident.
• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is turned to the ON position or the engine is started during automatic operation
●
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door. The power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may fall closed again after it is opened.
●
In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door main switch. Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.
■
Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
●
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
●
The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
NOTICE
■
Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.
Damper stay rod
●
Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
●
Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
●
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
●
Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.
■
To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with a power back door)
Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.
■
To prevent damage to the power back door (if equipped)
●
Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
●
Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.
●
Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.
1
49
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat
Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat
50
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment lever
Vertical height adjustment lever
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment knob
Seat lumbar support adjustment switch
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power seat
Passenger’s seat Driver’s seat
1
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Driver’s seat leg support adjustment switch (if equipped)
Seat lumbar support adjustment switch
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seatback table (if equipped on front passenger seat)
Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and raise the seatback to its upright position.
Pull the seatback folding lever and fold the seatback down.
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Seat adjustment
●
Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●
Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
■
After folding a seat (vehicles with seatback table)
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking the seat back and forth.
●
Do not sit on the folded seatback.
■
Caution while driving (vehicles with seatback table)
Do not fold the seatback forward to set up the seatback table while the vehicle is moving.
1
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
■
Second seats
Separated seat
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment lever
54
Bench seat
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat position adjustment lever
*
Seatback angle adjustment lever
*
:The center second seat can be moved forward further than side seats.
1
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Third seats
Manual seat
Seatback angle adjustment lever
56
Power seat
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seatback folding/returning switch
1
Moving a second seat for third seat access
■
Getting in the vehicle
Pull up the lever and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most position
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Getting out of the vehicle
Depress the release pedal and fold down the seatback. The seat will slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most position
Make sure that no passenger is seated on the second seat before depressing the release pedal.
■
After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.
Folding down the second seat
■
Before folding down the second seat
Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.
Stow the rear seat belt buckle.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Folding down the second seat
Separated seat
Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.
1
Bench seat
Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.
■
After folding down the second seat (if equipped)
Fold out the board from the seatback.
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Folding down the third seat
■
Before folding down the third seat
Insert the key into the hole on the center seat belt buckle to release tab (with hooked end), and allow the belt to retract.
Stow the seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof as shown.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.
1
Stow the third seat belt buckles.
■
Folding down the third seat
Manual seat (from rear door side)
Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Manual seat (from back door side)
Pull the lever to unlock the seatback and then fold the seatback down.
Power seat (from rear door side)
Press and hold the seatback folding switch until the seatback folds down fully and the buzzer sounds.
Power seat (from back door side)
Press and hold the seatback folding switch until the seatback folds down fully and the buzzer sounds.
■
The power third seat can be folded down/returned when
●
The engine switch is off or the shift lever is in P, with the rear door opened. (from rear door side)
●
The engine switch is off or the shift lever is in P, with the back door opened. (from back door side)
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
When adjusting a rear seat
●
Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●
Do not depress the second seat release pedal from the third seat while the second seat is occupied.
●
Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught in the seat.
■
Before folding down a rear seat
Do not fold down a rear seat when there are passengers sitting in the rear seats or when there is luggage placed on/under the rear seats.
■
After adjusting a seat
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Make sure that the seat and seatback are securely locked in position by lightly rocking them back and forth.
●
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
1
NOTICE
■
When folding down the seats
The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.
■
Second seatback board weight capacity
Do not place any object heavier than 220 lb. (100 kg) on the second seatback board.
■
Before sliding the center second seat to the most forward position
(vehicles with bench type second seat)
Ensure that the cup holder on the front console box is closed.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button.
Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■
Entering a position into memory
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the SET button, push button “1” or “2” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
■
Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
Push button “1” or “2” to recall the desired position.
: If equipped
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the driver’s door using the wireless remote control and open the driver’s door.
■
Setting the linked door unlock operation
Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1” or “2” buttons. (
Turn the engine switch off then, close the driver’s door.
Push the “1” or “2” button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear a beep.
1
Open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(
■
Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Close the driver’s door with the engine switch turned off.
Push the SET button and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Retained accessory power
Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can be activated within 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened, even if the key is not in the engine switch.
■
If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made
The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the button (“1” or “2”) again.
■
If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat position memory button.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Vertical adjustment
Lock release button
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Second seats
Lock release button
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Third seats
Lock release button
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
1
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Removing the head restraints
Front seats
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
Second seats
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
Third seats
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
■
Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Second seats
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
1
Third seats
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
■
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■
Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the lowermost position when using.
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
●
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
■
Correct use of the seat belts
●
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
●
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
●
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
●
Do not twist the seat belt.
■
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.
1
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
■
Adjusting the height of the belt
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Center third seat belt
The center third seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation.
Make sure that the buckle is securely latched for ready use of the center seat belt.
Matches the tab with the hooked end
Matches the tab with the concave end
■
Release method
The belt can be completely released when not required, such as when folding down the third seat.
Insert the key into the hole on the center seat belt buckle to release tab (with hooked end), and allow the belt to retract.
1
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Stow the seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof as shown.
74
■
Extracting the belt
Pull the belt out partially, and then remove the tabs from the cover.
Seat belt comfort guide (center third seat)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, use the seat belt comfort guide.
Pull the comfort guide from the pocket.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Slide the belt past the slot of the guide.
The elastic cord must be behind the seat belt.
1
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.
■
Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (
■
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (
●
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 71 regarding seat belt usage.
■
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.
1
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■
Wearing a seat belt
●
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●
Always wear a seat belt properly.
●
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
●
Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
77
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Wearing a seat belt
●
Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
●
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■
Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (
■
Seat belt pretensioners
●
Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.
■
Seat belt damage and wear
●
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
●
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●
Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
●
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Seat belt damage and wear
●
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.
■
Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
■
When using the center third seat belt
Do not use the center third seat belt with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.
1
■
Using a seat belt comfort guide (center third seat)
●
Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must be behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.
●
To reduce the chance of injury in case of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket when it is not in use.
●
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not slide off the shoulder.
Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Using a seat belt extender
●
Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
●
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●
The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
■
When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel (manually adjustable type)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.
1
Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
Auto tilt away
When the key is removed from the engine switch, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.
Inserting the key into the engine switch returns the steering wheel to its original position.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
82
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
1
83
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
Turns automatic mode ON/
OFF
The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned on.
84
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
1
■
If a sun visor interferes with the mirror
Hold and rotate the mirror to adjust the support.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
85
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Select a mirror to adjust.
(L: left or R: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch.
86
Folding back the mirrors
From outside
Push the mirrors towards the back of the vehicle to fold them.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
From inside (if equipped)
Press the switch.
Pressing again will unfold the mirrors.
1
Linked mirror function when reversing (if equipped)
Press the switch to turn on/off linked mirror function.
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically tilt downwards when the vehicle is in reverse, in order to give a better view of ground.
87
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (
■
Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (
■
Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (
CAUTION
■
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
●
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●
Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
■
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.
■
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
88
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
NOTICE
■
If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.
1
89
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Roof luggage carrier
Roof rails
Cross rails
90
Adjustment the position of cross rails
Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross rails.
Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading luggage.
After adjusting, be sure to tighten the cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.
: If equipped
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■
Cross rail adjustment
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by applying pressure forward and rearward.
Failure to do so may cause an accident, death or serious injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
■
When loading cargo
Observe the following precautions:
●
Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.
●
If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (
●
Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened to the roof luggage carrier.
●
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise unexpected loss of control or vehicle rollover may occur.
●
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle occasionally during the trip to make sure the cargo remains securely fastened.
●
Do not exceed 150 lb. (68 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
1
NOTICE
■
When loading the luggage
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
91
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.
Closing
One-touch closing
(Front windows only)
*
Opening
One-touch opening
(Front windows only)
*
*
: Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches and back window switch.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window and back window.
92
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
Door lock linked power windows operation
The power windows can be opened and closed using the key. (
■
Operating the power windows after turning the engine switch off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■
Jam protection function (Front windows only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. power windows) can be changed.
(Customizable features
1
CAUTION
■
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●
Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
■
Jam protection function
●
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
93
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power back window
The power back window can be opened and closed using the switch and key.
From inside
One-touch closing
* 1, * 2
Closing
One-touch opening
* 1
Opening
*
1
:Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
* 2
:During off-road traveling, the one-touch closing operation may be deactivated depending on the vehicle speed and road surface conditions. At that time, close the window using the normal closing operation
.
From outside
Opening
Closing
Turn the key fully and hold it.
94
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
The power back window can be operated when
●
The engine switch is in the ON position.
●
The power back window can be opened when the rear window wiper is working. At that time, the wiper stops working until the window is closed again.
If the rear window is not fully closed, the rear window wiper, washer, and defogger will not work.
■
Operating the power back window after turning the engine switch off
The power back window can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC position or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. rear window) can be changed.
(Customizable features
1
CAUTION
■
Closing the power back window
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●
Do not allow children to operate the power back window.
Closing a power back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
■
Jam protection function
●
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
95
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.
■
Opening and closing
Open
Close
To stop partway, press the switch lightly.
■
Tilt up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
To stop partway, press the switch lightly.
: If equipped
96
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. (
■
Operating the moon roof after turning the engine switch off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “SLIDE” switch.
*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.
*2
Then it will close again, tilt up and stop.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely stopped and then release the switch.
*1
:If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2
:If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 seconds pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “SLIDE” or “TILT” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and stop. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely stopped and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■
To reduce wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
1
97
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■
Moon roof open reminder function
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and the engine switch off.
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. moon roof) can be changed.
(Customizable features
CAUTION
■
Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
●
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■
Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●
Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■
Jam protection function
●
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.
●
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.
98
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■
Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
■
Opening the fuel tank cap
Open the fuel filler door.
1
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.
99
1-5. Refueling
Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.
Closing the fuel tank cap
When installing the fuel tank cap, turn it until you hear a click.
The cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction when released.
■
Fuel types (Gasoline engine)
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)
■
Fuel types (Flex-fuel engine)
Use unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels. (
100
1-5. Refueling
■
Identifying flex-fuel vehicles
●
Flex-fuel vehicles can be identified by the fuel tank cap, which is marked
“FLEXFUEL E85/GASOLINE”.
1
■
Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 26.4 gal. (100 L, 22.0 Imp. gal.)
■
E85 Fueling Stations (Flex-fuel vehicles)
E85 fueling stations and fuel pumps can be identified by the indication “E85
85% Ethanol”. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of Energy Web site.
http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/
■
Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)
Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain starting and driving performance.
●
Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.
●
Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.
●
After filling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km).
●
Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.
101
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.
●
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
●
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
●
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
102
1-5. Refueling
NOTICE
■
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.
■
To prevent damage to the fuel filler door
Do not apply excessive force.
■
E85 fuel
E85 fuel can be used only in flex-fuel vehicles. Do not add E85 fuel to a gasoline-engine vehicle.
Filling a gasoline-engine vehicle with E85 will have a negative impact on starting and driving performance and will cause damage to the fuel system components.
1
103
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.
■
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●
If the key is in contact with a metallic object
●
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■
Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
104
1-6. Theft deterrent system
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
1
NOTICE
■
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
105
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected.
■
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set.
●
A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the wireless remote control door lock function or key.
The doors will lock again automatically.
●
The hood is opened.
●
Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor (if equipped): The side windows are tapped or broken.
●
The battery is reconnected.
■
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.
■
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
●
Unlock the doors.
●
Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position, or start the engine.
(The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
106
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following.
●
Nobody is in the vehicle.
●
The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
●
A person inside the vehicle opens a door or hood.
1
●
The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■
Panic mode
■
When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
107
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■
Alarm-operated door lock
●
When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders.
●
Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
108
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in the seat. (
Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (
Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(
1
109
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
While driving
●
Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●
Do not place anything under the front seats except for putting them in the auxiliary box.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■
Adjusting the seat position
●
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
●
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
●
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
110
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
1
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside seat occupants.
111
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Side airbags
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG
OFF indicator lights
Curtain shield airbags
Front passenger airbag
Knee airbags
Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
Front airbag sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light and
RSCA OFF indicator light
RSCA OFF switch
(4WD models only)
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
112
1-7. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
1
■
SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, RSCA OFF indicator light, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (
■
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●
The front windshield may crack.
113
1-7. Safety information
■
Operating conditions (front airbags)
●
The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12-18 mph [20-30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under the bed of a truck, etc.).
●
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (
■
Operating conditions (side airbags & curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbags & SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3307 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximately speed of 12-18 mph [20-30 km/ h]).
■
Operating conditions (side airbags)
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will activate even if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. (
■
Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags)
The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover. Depending on the conditions and type of accident, there are times when the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) in a front impact.
114
1-7. Safety information
■
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
●
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●
Landing hard or vehicle falling
1
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration.
●
The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●
The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
■
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●
Collision from the side
●
Collision from the rear
●
Vehicle rollover
115
1-7. Safety information
■
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
●
Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
●
Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.
●
Collision from the front
●
Collision from the rear
●
Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
●
Collision from the rear
●
Pitching end over end
116
1-7. Safety information
■
When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●
The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
1
●
A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
●
The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
●
The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
●
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
117
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you now sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away, you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals and steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
118
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
●
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (
1
119
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
●
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●
Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees.
●
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
120
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
●
Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.
●
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
●
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys or accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver’s seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.
●
If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbags will deploy, be sure to remove it.
●
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags.
●
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
1
121
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
SRS airbag precautions
●
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
■
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
●
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.
●
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment.
●
Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
●
Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system.
●
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players.
●
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
122
1-7. Safety information
Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover (4WD models only)
On/off (hold for a few seconds)
The RSCA OFF indicator turns on. (only when the engine switch is in the ON position.)
1
■
The switch only should be used
In a situation where inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off-road driving).
■
Operating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on
●
The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a vehicle rollover.
●
The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.
CAUTION
■
For normal driving
Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
123
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
AIR BAG ON indicator light
AIR BAG OFF indicator light
124
1-7. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
■
Adult*
1
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
AIR BAG ON
Off
Flashing*
Activated
2
■
Child*
3
or child restraint system*
4
1
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
AIR BAG
OFF*
5
Off
Flashing*
2
Deactivated
Activated
125
1-7. Safety information
■
Unoccupied
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Not illuminated
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
■
There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/ warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
AIR BAG
OFF
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
126
1-7. Safety information
*
3
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*
4
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(
*
5
: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for installing the child restraint system properly. (
1
CAUTION
■
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●
Wear the seat belt properly.
●
Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●
Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
●
Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
●
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●
Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
●
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
127
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●
Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
●
If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●
When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (
●
Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●
Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
●
Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
●
Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
128
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
1
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(
Types of child restraint
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat
129
1-7. Safety information
Forward facing — Convertible seat
Booster seat
■
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts.
●
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (
130
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Child restraint precautions
●
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
●
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
1
131
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
Child restraint precautions
●
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
■
Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
■
When the child restraint system is not in use
●
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
132
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
■
Using the LATCH anchors
Second seat (Separated seat)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for all of the second seats.
(Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
1
Second seats (Bench seat)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for all of the second seats.
(Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
133
1-7. Safety information
■
Using the seat belts
Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (
■
Using the top tether strap
Anchor brackets
(for top tether strap)
Second seats (Separated seat)
Anchor brackets are provided for all of the second seats.
134
1-7. Safety information
Second seats (Bench seat)
Anchor brackets are provided for all of the second seats.
1
Third seats
Anchor bracket is provided for the center third seat.
Installation with LATCH system (second seat only)
Second seat (except center seat)
Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position).
Adjust the seatback to the 4th lock position. (
1st lock position
4th lock position
135
1-7. Safety information
Center second seat (bench seat)
Fold the seatback while pulling the lever. Return the seatback and secure it at the 1st lock position (most upright position).
Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position. (
1st lock position
8th lock position
Type A
Canada only
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.
The anchors are installed in the lower seatback under a flap. Confirm the position of the anchors below the symbol in the seatback.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
(
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
136
Type B
Canada only
1-7. Safety information
Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps.
The anchors are installed in the lower seatback under a flap. Confirm the position of the anchors below the symbol in the seatback.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
(
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
1
137
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■
Rear facing
Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
138
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
■
Forward facing
Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
1
Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.
139
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (
■
Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible.
(
140
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
1
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Second seat
Secure the child restraint using the LATCH anchors or seat belt, and adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.
Center third seat
Secure the child restraint using the LATCH anchors or seat belt, and adjust the head restraint to the upmost position.
141
1-7. Safety information
Second seat
Center third seat
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
Hook
Top tether strap
Anchor bracket
Open the anchor bracket cover.
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
Hook
Top tether strap
Anchor bracket
Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position.
142
1-7. Safety information
■
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
1
CAUTION
■
When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode. (
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.
■
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●
If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
143
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
When installing a child restraint system
●
Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG
OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
●
When installing a child restraint system in the third center seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. The seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●
When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●
Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.
●
After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
144
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■
When installing a child restraint system (vehicles with bench type second seat)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
●
When installing the child restraint system onto the center second seat, secure it so as not interfere with the front console box.
●
Do not change the posture and position of the outside second seat once the child restraint system has been secured to the center second seat.
■
Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
1
145
1-7. Safety information
146
When driving
2
Driving the vehicle............ 148
Engine (ignition) switch .... 157
Automatic transmission.... 160
Turn signal lever .............. 164
Parking brake................... 165
Horn ................................. 166
Gauges and meters ......... 167
Indicators and warning lights .............................. 172
Multi-information display............................ 177
Accessory meter .............. 183
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control................... 195
Dynamic laser cruise control ............................ 198
Intuitive parking assist...... 209
Rear view monitor system ........................... 216
Electronically modulated air suspension................ 223
Four-wheel drive system ........................... 229
AUTO LSD system........... 234
Driving assist systems ..... 236
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch............... 186
Fog light switch ................ 190
Windshield wipers and washer ........................... 191
Rear window wiper and washer ........................... 193
Headlight cleaner switch............................. 194
Off-road precautions ........ 242
Cargo and luggage .......... 247
Vehicle load limits ............ 251
Winter driving tips ............ 253
Trailer towing ................... 257
Dinghy towing .................. 277
147
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■
Starting the engine (
P. 157)
■
Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(
Release the parking brake.
(
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■
Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N.
(
■
Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake.
(
Shift the shift lever to P.
(
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Turn the engine switch off to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
With the brake pedal depressed, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
148
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Driving in the rain
●
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
●
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■
Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:
●
For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●
For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●
For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■
Drum-in disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down.
■
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (
2
149
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■
When driving the vehicle
●
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
●
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●
Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back door and power back window are closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
●
Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
150
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When driving the vehicle
●
Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident.
●
Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
●
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (
●
When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
●
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.
●
Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
●
If you drive through deep water over about 20 in. (500 mm) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI mode using the height control switch and then change to manual mode by pushing the height control mode select switch.
Drive your vehicle at 18 mph (30 km/h) or less. Do not drive through water deeper than about 28 in. (700 mm) even if the vehicle height is in “HI” mode.
2
151
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When driving on slippery road surfaces
●
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●
Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■
When shifting the shift lever
●
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■
When the vehicle is stopped
●
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●
In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
●
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
152
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When the vehicle is parked
●
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
●
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●
If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode. (
●
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
2
153
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●
The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■
When braking the vehicle
●
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■
When braking the vehicle
●
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
2
NOTICE
■
When driving the vehicle
●
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
●
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■
When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
●
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
155
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●
The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (
■
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
●
Engine stalling
●
Short in electrical components
●
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
●
Brake function
●
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD models), differentials, etc.
●
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
■
Engine switch
LOCK
The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)
ACC
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.
ON
All electrical components can be used.
START
For starting the engine.
■
Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
2
157
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Turning the key from ACC to LOCK
Shift the shift lever to P.
(
Push in the key and turn to the
LOCK position.
■
Steering lock release
When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction.
■
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (
■
Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■
Caution while driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.
If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the ACC position.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods if the engine is not running.
■
When starting the engine
●
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
●
Do not race a cold engine.
●
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
2
159
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■
Shifting the shift lever
160
While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
■
Shift position uses
Shift position
P
R
Function
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
Reversing
N
D
S
Neutral
Normal driving
* 1
S mode driving
*
2
(
* 1
: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in
D for normal driving.
* 2
: Selecting shift ranges S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, control engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
2
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. (
■
Shift ranges and their functions
Shift range
6
5
4
3
2
1
Function
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
Setting the gear at 1.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.
161
2-1. Driving procedures
TOW/HAUL switch (with towing package)
Use TOW/HAUL mode when pulling a trailer or hauling a heavy load.
Press the TOW/HAUL switch.
The indicator will come on.
Press the switch once more to cancel the mode.
■
Gear range display when driving in S mode
The current gear range is displayed on the combination meter. (
■
When driving with the cruise control system
The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to
5 or 4. (
■
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
■
If the S indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to
S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer, immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
162
2-1. Driving procedures
■
Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
2
163
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.
The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.
■
Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
U.S.A.
Canada
Set the parking brake*.
(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)
At this time, the indicator will come on.
*: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.
2
■
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
■
Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (
NOTICE
■
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
165
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.
■
After adjusting the steering wheel (vehicles with manual tilt and telescopic steering)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(
166
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Vehicles with multi-information display
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state.
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
167
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge
Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.
168
Vehicles without multi-information display
2-2. Instrument cluster
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Voltmeter
Displays the charge state.
Engine oil pressure gauge
Displays the engine oil pressure.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
169
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/trip meter
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge (if equipped)
Displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature.
Odometer and trip meter display button
Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter displays.
Vehicles with multi-information display
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
Trip meter B
*
*
:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.
Vehicles without multi-information display
Odometer
Trip meter A
*
Trip meter B
*
*
:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.
170
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
Vehicles with multi-information display
With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced even when the tail lights/headlights are turned on.
2
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
●
The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
■
While driving
●
When the voltmeter indicates more than 19 V or less than 9 V, the battery may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer.
●
When the engine oil pressure gauge does not work properly, immediately stop the engine and contact your Toyota dealer.
●
When the automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal, immediately contact your Toyota dealer. (if equipped)
171
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster (vehicles with multi-information display)
Instrument cluster (vehicles without multi-information display)
172
Center panel
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
173
2-2. Instrument cluster
174
■
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(
Tail light indicator
(
(Canada)
*
1
Headlight high beam indicator (
AUTO LSD indicator
(
Security indicator
(
Shift position and shift range indicators
(
Center differential lock indicator (
(4WD models)
*
1,6
RSCA OFF indicator
(
*
1
AIR BAG ON indicator
(
*
1
AIR BAG OFF indicator
(
Cruise control indicator
(
*
1,4
Slip indicator
(
*
1
VSC OFF indicator
(
Headlight indicator
(
(U.S.A.)
4HI indicator (
(4WD models)
4LO indicator (
(4WD models)
TOW HAUL indicator
(
(If equipped)
*
1
Height control HI indicator (
2-2. Instrument cluster
*
1
Height control N indicator (
*
1
Height control MAN. indicator (
*
1
Height control LO indicator (
■
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (
* 2 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1
*
1
*
3
(Canada) (U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(U.S.A.)
*
3
*
1,7
(U.S.A.)
*
1,5
*
1
*
1
(Flashing)
* 1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.
* 2
: Vehicles with multi-information display
* 3
: Vehicles without multi-information display
* 4
: The indicator flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
* 5
: The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction.
* 6
: For 2WD models, even though there is no function of deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover, the RSCA OFF indicator turns on briefly when the engine switch is turned to the ON position. But this is not a malfunction.
* 7
: The indicator flashes to indicate a malfunction.
175
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.
176
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data.
●
Trip information
(
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related information.
●
Warning messages
(
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.
●
Odometer and trip meter display (
2
Trip information
Display items can be switched by pushing the INFO button.
: If equipped
177
2-2. Instrument cluster
Zoom display of odometer and trip meters
Displays the odometer and one of the trip meters simultaneously.
Average Fuel Economy
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT
RESET button for more than 2 seconds when the
Average Fuel Economy is displayed.
Current Fuel Economy
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
178
Distance To Empty (driving range)
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
●
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
●
When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
Trip Timer
Displays the driving time.
To calculate the driving time, press the SELECT
RESET button, and to stop the calculation, press it again.
To reset the calculation, press the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds.
2-2. Instrument cluster
Average Speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the SELECT
RESET button for more than 2 seconds when the
Average Speed is displayed.
Feature customization
The vehicle can be customized while the vehicle is stopped.
Press the SETUP button to select the item you want to customize unit.
UNITS
2
KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK
KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER
KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK
DOOR AUTO LOCKING
DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING
HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER
COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER
DEFAULT SETTING
179
2-2. Instrument cluster
Press the SELECT RESET button to customize the items.
Items
To select Unit A or Unit B
(
Screen text
UNITS
Select in this order
Unit A Unit B
Door lock/ unlock warning function
KEYLESS ENTRY
FEEDBACK
LAMPS + TONE
*
LAMPS
OFF
60 SECONDS
*
TONE
Time for automatic door lock function
KEYLESS ENTRY
RELOCK TIMER
120 SECONDS
30 SECONDS OFF
Double switch operation to unlock all the doors
KEYLESS ENTRY
ALL DOORS
UNLOCK
2 PRESSES
*
1 PRESS
Automatic door locking function
Automatic door unlocking function
Time period before lights turn off (if a door is opened and closed, and engine switch is in ACC or
LOCK)
Time period before lights turn off
Reset to default setting
*
: Default setting
180
DOOR AUTO
LOCKING
DOOR AUTO
UNLOCKING
HEADLAMPS AUTO
OFF TIMER
SHIFT OUT
OF PARK
SHIFT TO PARK
*
ABOVE 12 MPH
*
(20 km/h)
OFF
DRIVER DOOR
OPEN
OFF
30 SECONDS
*
0 SECONDS
60 SECONDS
90 SECONDS
COURTESY LAMPS
OFF TIMER
15 SECONDS
*
8 SECONDS
30 SECONDS
HOLD RESET
TO RESTORE
DEFAULT SETTINGS
2-2. Instrument cluster
After customize is complete, press the SETUP button to set the selected item.
If the customization fails, the previously setting will be displayed.
If no button is pressed for 10 seconds, the display change to normal display.
■
To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit)
Press the SETUP button to display UNITS on the multi-information display.
Press the SELECT RESET button to change the units.
Press the INFO or SETUP button and complete the unit change.
Information
Average Fuel Economy and
Current Fuel Economy
Driving Range
Average Speed
Outside temperature display on the accessory meter
Unit A
MPG
MILES
MPH
°F
Unit B
L/100 Km
Km
Km/h
°C
■
Feature customization error
• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated, turn the engine switch off and then on again.
• If SYSTEM ERROR message is indicated again, contact your Toyota dealer.
2
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the display.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
181
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■
The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
182
2-2. Instrument cluster
Accessory meter
Outside temperature display
Displays the outside air temperature. (
Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)
Displays the outside temperature and trip information.
(
Clock
(
H (Hour) button
(
M (Minute) button
(
INFO button (if equipped)
SELECT RESET button (if equipped)
SETUP button (if equipped)
183
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
Outside temperature and trip information display (if equipped)
Every time the INFO button is pushed, the display toggles through these information.
●
OUTSIDE (outside temperature display)
Displays the outside air temperature.
●
AVG (average fuel consumption after refueling)
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.
The function can be reset by pushing the
SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds.
●
INST (current fuel consumption)
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
●
RANGE (driving range)
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
●
Display off
184
2-2. Instrument cluster
■
The accessory meter can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
■
To select the unit A (English/U.S. customary system) or unit B (metric unit) (vehicles without multi-information display)
Press the SETUP button to change the units.
Information
Average fuel consumption and current fuel consumption
Driving range
Outside temperature
Unit A
MPG
MILES
°F
Unit B
L/100 Km
Km
°C
2
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the display.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
185
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
U.S.A.
Canada
OFF
Vehicles with daytime running light system:
The daytime running lights turn on.
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights
(if equipped) and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The headlights, daytime running lights (if equipped) and all lights listed above turn on and off automatically.
(When the engine switch is in the ON position)
186
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The daytime running lights turn off.
The headlights, side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instruments panel lights turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in the ON position)
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
2
187
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
■
Daytime running light system (if equipped)
●
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front turn signal lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Type B only: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
●
Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
■
Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.
188
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■
Automatic light off system
●
When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights automatically turn off after 30 seconds when all doors are closed with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the wireless remote control is pressed after all doors are locked.)
●
When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn the headlight switch off once and then back to the or position.
■
Customization
●
That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display)
Settings (automatic light off system) can be changed. (Customizable features
●
It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization
2
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
189
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
OFF
Front fog lights ON
190
: If equipped
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when
is selected.)
Intermittent windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
2
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
191
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
■
The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
■
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
■
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.
■
When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
192
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
Intermittent window wiper operation
Normal window wiper operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
Washer/wiper dual operation
The rear window wiper operates while the washer squirts.
2
■
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
●
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
●
The back window is fully closed.
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. washer linkage wiper control) can be changed.
(Customizable features
NOTICE
■
When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
193
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the headlights.
■
The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position and the headlights are turned on.
NOTICE
■
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.
: If equipped
194
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■
Set the vehicle speed
Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control on.
At this time, the cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and push the lever down to set the cruise control speed.
2
195
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pushing the lever up or down and releasing it.
■
Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
■
Cruise control can be set when
●
The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and
6 in S mode.
●
Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
196
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
●
Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●
Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●
VSC is activated.
●
The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after operating the front wheel drive control switch or the center differential lock switch.
■
If the cruise control indicator flashes
Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control off, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
2
CAUTION
■
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.
■
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●
In heavy traffic
●
On roads with sharp bends
●
On winding roads
●
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill
●
When your vehicle is towing anything
197
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic laser cruise control
Dynamic laser cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
Distance switch
198
■
Select cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control on.
Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.
: If equipped
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Press the ON-OFF button to turn the cruise control on.
Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the engine switch is turned to the ON position.
Switch to constant speed control mode.
(push the cruise main switch forward and hold for approximately one second)
■
Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set.
2
199
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.
■
Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Pull the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.
200
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each push of the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the engine switch is turned to the ON position.
A vehicle symbol will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you.
2
201
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a laser radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.
202
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead):
When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed):
When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed):
When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead):
When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.
2
■
Fine adjustment of the set speed
Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
U.S.A.: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
Canada: Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
■
Dynamic laser cruise control warning lights, display and buzzers
Warning lights, display and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (
■
The dynamic laser cruise can be set when
●
The shift lever is in D or the shift range position must be in between 4 and
6 in S mode.
●
Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■
Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
203
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●
Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
●
VSC is activated
●
The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
*
●
The windshield wipers are operating at high or low speed.
*
●
The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after operating the front wheel drive control switch or the center differential lock switch.
*
:Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by pressing the
ON-OFF button again.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■
Automatically canceling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●
Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●
Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
●
VSC is activated
●
The operation cannot be switched for 5 seconds or more after operating the front wheel drive control switch or the center differential lock switch.
■
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Long
Medium
Short
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Approximately 245 ft. (75 m)
Approximately 165 ft. (50 m)
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
204
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Laser radar sensor
Always keep the sensor clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic laser cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
■
Certification
This product is a class l laser product complied with 21C.F.R part 1040.10
and 1040.11.
2
CAUTION
■
To avoid bodily injury
●
Do not look into the aperture window.
●
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
■
Before using dynamic laser cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■
To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Turn off the system when not in use.
205
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Situations unsuitable for dynamic laser cruise control
Do not use dynamic laser cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident.
●
In heavy traffic
●
On roads with sharp bends
●
On winding roads
●
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●
On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
●
At entrances to expressways
●
When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, rain, snow, sandstorm, direct sunlight, etc.)
●
Where buzzer can be heard often
●
When your vehicle is towing anything
■
When the laser radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (
P. 592) will not be activated, and an accident may
result.
●
The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance, which means that the placement of the reflectors is in a higher position.
●
The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.
●
The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you are flinging up water or snow.
●
Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming from the vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you, obscuring your front view.
206
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
When the laser radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
●
There is an obstruction (protective film, sticker, etc.) on the reflectors on the vehicle ahead, or reflectors are not installed on the vehicle ahead or are damaged.
●
Heavy luggage in the luggage compartment or rear seats is causing the nose of your vehicle to tilt up.
●
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●
Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●
Vehicles that are not moving
●
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■
Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the laser radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
●
When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor
●
When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)
●
When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●
When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●
When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
●
When towing a trailer
2
207
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
To ensure the laser radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
●
Stick or attach anything to them
●
Leave them dirty
●
Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
●
Modify or paint them
●
Replace them with non-genuine parts
NOTICE
■
Handling the laser radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
●
Keep the sensor clean at all times.
Clean the sensor with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.
●
Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction.
If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Toyota dealer.
●
Do not disassemble the sensor.
●
Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, surrounding area.
208
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The intuitive parking assist is designed to inform you of the approximate distance between your vehicle and an obstruction by indicator and buzzer when parking the vehicle. This system uses sensors to detect obstructions.
This system works when the engine switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is not in P.
Back and rear corner sensors work only when the shift lever is in
R.
Front corner sensors work when:
●
The shift lever is in R
●
The shift lever is not in P or R and vehicle speed is approximate
6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
2
Back sensors
Rear corner sensors
Front corner sensors
: If equipped
209
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Intuitive parking assist switch
Press the switch to turn on.
(To turn off, press the switch again.)
When on, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver that the system is operational. At this time, the indicator will come on.
The distance and buzzer
■
When a sensor detects an obstacle.
The buzzer sounds.
Back sensors
Zone
Far
Mid
Near
Distance shown as A in in. (mm)
Approximately
70.9—45.3
(1800—1150)
Approximately
45.3—33.5
(1150—850)
Approximately
33.5 (850) or less
Indicator and buzzer
Intermittent
Fast intermittent
Continuous
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear corner sensors
Zone
Far
Mid
Near
Distance shown as B in in. (mm)
Indicator and buzzer
Approximately
33.5—20.5
(850—520)
Approximately
20.5—15.7
(520—400)
Approximately
15.7 (400) or less
Intermittent
Fast intermittent
Continuous
2
Front corner sensors
Zone
Far
Mid
Near
Distance shown as C in in. (mm)
Indicator and buzzer
Approximately
23.6—15.7
(600—400)
Intermittent
Approximately
15.7—9.8
(400—250)
Approximately
9.8 (250) or less
Fast intermittent
Continuous
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously
The buzzer system responds to the nearest zone.
■
When multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the same time
The buzzer will change in the following manner.
●
If an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the front or 33.5 (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 7 times then one continuous buzzer.
●
If an obstacle has been detected within 15.7 in. (400 mm) of the front or 33.5 in. (850 mm) in rear of the vehicle (a continuous buzzer is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected at the same way at the other end of the vehicle, the buzzer will sound 3 times then one continuous buzzer.
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
Sensors that operate and detection range
The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.
■
Detection range of the sensors
2
Back sensors
Rear corner sensors
Front corner sensors
Perceptible area
A. Approx. 70.9 in. (1800 mm)
B. Approx. 33.5 in. (850 mm)
C.Approx. 23.6 in. (600 mm)
The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.
213
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Sensor detection information
●
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
• A sensor is frozen.
• A sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.
• A towing hitch is mounted to the vehicle.
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• When attaching a two-way radio antenna.
• When a towing eyelet is mounted on your vehicle.
• When the bumper is damaged.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.
●
The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
214
2-4. Using other driving systems
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
• A person near the vehicle (depending on the type of clothes worn)
• When the bumper is damaged.
■
Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■
If the indicator is continuously on
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■
If the indicator remains blinking but do not sound the buzzer
Clean the sensors with soft cloth.
2
CAUTION
■
Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
●
Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●
Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
215
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
The rear view image is displayed on the inside rear view mirror.
The screen is turned off if any one of the following conditions are met:
• The shift lever is shifted out of R
• The screen remains on for 5 minutes
Shift lever
Screen
: If equipped
216
■
Rear view monitor guide lines
2-4. Using other driving systems
●
Guide lines are displayed on the monitor.
Vehicle width extension guide lines (blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle width extension.
Distance guide line (blue)
This line indicates a position on the ground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on the ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.
Distance guide line (red)
This line indicates a position on the ground about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind on the ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.
Vehicle center guide lines (blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
2
217
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
The rear view monitor system can be operated when
The shift lever is in R and the engine switch is ON.
■
Display mode
The rear view monitor display mode can be adjusted when the engine switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is in R.
Press the button.
●
To temporarily turn off the monitor when it is on.
Press the button. The indicator should turn orange.
The monitor will automatically turn on again after the engine switch is turned off and on.
●
To manually turn on the monitor when it is turned off.
Press the button. The indicator should turn green.
●
To select a display language (English, French, or Spanish).
Press and hold the button for 6 seconds.
The monitor should turn on and the indicator should turn green.
Press the button.
Each time the button is pressed and released, the language will change. The warning message should flash once after about 5 seconds, indicating that the change has been completed.
●
To permanently disable the monitor.
Press and hold the button for 12 to 15 seconds.
The monitor will turn off and on after 6 seconds. Continue holding the button down until the display turns back off.
The indicator should flash orange.
The monitor will not automatically turn on again after the engine switch is turned off and on.
218
■
Displayed area
2-4. Using other driving systems
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
2
Corners of bumper
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Rear view monitor system camera
The rear view monitor system camera is located on the back door as shown in the illustration.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.
●
The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.
●
The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.
●
Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains.
●
Foreign matter, such as snow or mud, adheres to the camera lens.
●
The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.
●
A bright object such as a white wall is reflected in the mirror surface over the monitor.
●
When the camera has scratches or dirt on it.
■
Smear effect
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* characteristic to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect
A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Flicker effect
When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
CAUTION
■
When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.
●
Never depend solely on the rear view monitor system when reversing.
●
Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
●
Always check the vehicle surrounding area, because the guide lines are estimates of distance and location.
●
The guide lines are assistant lines and do not change even if the steering wheel is turned.
●
Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.
●
Do not use the system if back door is open.
■
Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●
If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●
Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●
If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●
The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold.
■
Caution while driving in reverse
Do not change modes while the vehicle is moving.
2
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
●
As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
●
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●
Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
●
When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
222
2-4. Using other driving systems
Electronically modulated air suspension
The electronically modulated air suspension allows the driver to control the vehicle’s height in order to adjust for driving conditions.
Select the desired height with the height control switch.
Height control switch
Height control mode select switch
2
Selecting vehicle height
Higher
Lower
Vehicle height can be adjusted only when the engine is running.
The height control indicator stops blinking, and comes on continuously to indicate that the mode shift is completed.
: If equipped
223
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Height modes
●
N mode (normal mode): For ordinary driving
Normal height
●
HI mode (high mode): For driving on bumpy roads
1.2 in. (30 mm) higher than the normal height
The HI mode is unavailable when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
18 mph (30 km/h).
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.
●
LO mode (low mode): For the ease of egress/ingress and loading luggage
1.2 in. (30 mm) lower than the normal height
The LO mode is unavailable when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h).
When the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.
Disabling the height control
When the height control mode select switch is pressed, the vehicle height is fixed at the current height.
The height can be adjusted by pressing the height control switch.
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h), the height will be adjusted to the normal height automatically.
224
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Automatic leveling function
Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage load, vehicle height in any mode is always adjusted to a fixed height by the automatic leveling function.
■
When HI mode is selected
The vehicle height will change to N mode when driving at the speeds of 18 mph (30 km/h).
■
When LO mode is selected
●
The vehicle height will change to N mode when vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h).
●
This mode allows for easy access to the vehicle (getting in and out) and easy loading and unloading.
■
The electronically modulated air suspension will not operate in the following cases:
●
The underbody of the vehicle is touching the surface of the road.
●
The area around the suspension is covered with ice.
The height control indicators will blink, turn off and then turn on continuously to indicate that the electronically modulated air suspension is not operational.
To re-enable operation, turn off the engine and then restart it.
■
Even if you hear an operating noise
This does not indicate a problem in the electronically modulated air suspension.
■
If there is a problem somewhere in the electronically modulated air suspension
The height control MAN. indicator will behave as follows:
●
The indicator will not come on when the engine switch is turned on.
●
The indicator will blink.
Although the vehicle may be driven, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
2
225
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
The electronically modulated air suspension must be turned off in the following circumstances:
Otherwise, the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle’s height to change, resulting in an unexpected accident.
●
When driving through water such as shallow streams (Put the vehicle height in HI mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspension.
Drive at 18 mph [30 km/h] or slower.)
●
When jacking up the vehicle, installing tire chains or tying the vehicle with chains/wires for transportation via flat bed truck (Turn the system to the manual mode and stop the engine.)
●
When the vehicle must be towed (Put the vehicle height in N mode and turn the system to the manual mode.)
●
When the vehicle gets stuck (Turn the system to the manual mode.)
●
When disconnecting a trailer (Put the vehicle height in LO mode and turn the system to the manual mode.)
■
Selecting the correct height mode
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the vehicle, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
●
Before you lower the vehicle’s height, check under the vehicle to make sure that no one is there.
●
The HI mode should be used for off-road driving conditions.
As the vehicle’s center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly.
●
Do not select HI mode when you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier.
This may result in a loss of control or vehicle rollover.
226
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■
Be careful in any place where overhead space is limited.
When changing to a higher mode or after unloading, the vehicle height will rise. This may cause damage to the vehicle.
■
Do not select LO mode when driving on bumpy roads.
If the underbody of the vehicle touches a rugged road surface, the vehicle may be damaged.
■
Do not change the vehicle height frequently.
The compressor might overheat and cause the operation to stop.
■
When on the extremely uneven roads with rocks
Sometimes the vehicle height is not adjusted because it is judged as uneven road driving.
2
227
2-4. Using other driving systems
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)
AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions. Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation.
Sport mode
For winding mountain road driving or high speed driving.
Normal mode
For ordinary driving.
Comfort mode
For driving on a bumpy road.
■
Driving mode
●
Sport mode is suitable for winding mountain road driving, high speed driving or towing a trailer.
●
Normal mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
: If equipped
228
2-4. Using other driving systems
Four-wheel drive system
Use the front wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer modes.
* 1
* 2
2
* 1
: Vehicles with multi-information display
* 2
: Vehicles without multi-information display
2WD (high speed position, two-wheel drive)
Normal driving.
4H (high speed position, four-wheel drive)
Greater traction than two wheel drive.
When you experience a loss of power, such as wheel slipping.
The 4HI indicator comes on.
4L (low speed position, four-wheel drive)
Driving requiring maximum power and traction such as climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving and hard pulling in sand or mud, etc.
The 4LO indicator comes on.
: If equipped
229
2-4. Using other driving systems
Shifting between 4H and 4L
■
Shifting from 4H to 4L
Stop the vehicle completely.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Push and turn the front wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.
Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns on.
■
Shifting from 4L to 4H
Stop the vehicle completely.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Turn the front wheel drive control switch fully counterclockwise.
Maintain this condition until the 4LO indicator turns off.
Center differential lock switch
Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy surface.
Unlock the center differential after the wheels have been freed, or after moving to a flat, non-slippery surface.
230
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Shifting between 2WD and 4H
●
Reduce your speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h) and set the front wheel drive control switch between 2WD and 4H.
When the ambient temperature is 5.0°F (-15°C) or lower, shifting from
2WD to 4H cannot be performed with the vehicle speed above 43 mph (70 km/h).
●
If the 4HI indicator does not go off when you shift from 4H to 2WD, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
■
Four-wheel drive usage frequency
You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.
■
The center differential lock switch can be operated when
●
The front wheel drive control switch is in the 4H or 4L position.
●
The vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h)
■
Center differential lock system
●
When the front wheel drive control switch is in the 4L position and the center differential is locked, the VSC is automatically turned off.
●
When the front wheel drive control switch is turned to the 2WD position, the center differential is automatically unlocked.
●
If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks. If the indicator does not go off when unlocking the center differential, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
2
231
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
If the 4LO indicator, 4HI indicator or the center differential lock indicator blinks
●
If the 4LO indicator continues to blink when shifting between 4H and 4L, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and operate the switch again.
●
If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode.
To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to N, and confirm that the shift was completed (The indicator turns on/off).
●
If the engine coolant temperature is too low, transfer mode may not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer, turn the switch again.
If the 4LO indicator, 4HI indicator or the center differential lock indicator continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able to shift between 2WD and 4H, 4H and 4L, and the center differential lock may not be operable. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■
Shifting to 4L position
The VSC OFF indicator will come on.
If the center differential is locked, VSC is automatically turned off.
232
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Shifting from 2WD to 4H while driving
Never operate the front wheel drive control switch if the wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
■
When the vehicle is parked
●
If the shift lever is moved before the 4LO indicator turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in
P. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer mode before placing transmission in P. (
2
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the center differential
●
For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.
●
Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the loose or bumpy surface.
●
Do not push the center differential lock switch when the vehicle is cornering or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.
233
2-4. Using other driving systems
AUTO LSD system
The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin.
The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.
■
System operation
The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on
4WD models.
The system is activated when driving at a speed under 62 mph
(100 km/h).
The AUTO LSD system will be activated with the following two procedures.
Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.
At this time, the slip and AUTO
LSD indicators will come on.
To turn off the system, push the switch again.
Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.
At this time, the slip, VSC OFF and AUTO LSD indicators will come on simultaneously.
To turn off the system, push the switch again.
234
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the AUTO LSD system is operating
If the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the AUTO LSD system has controlled the spinning of the rear wheels.
2
■
If the engine is turned off and restarted
The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.
■
If the brake system overheats
The AUTO LSD system will cease operation, and the slip indicator will change from flashing to being on continuously to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
The system will be automatically restored after a short time.
CAUTION
■
To avoid an accident
●
Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above.
A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be required.
●
Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.
235
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■
Brake Assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.
■
TRAC (Traction Control) for 2WD
Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■
A-TRAC (Active Traction Control) for 4WD
Maintains drive power and prevents all wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
When VSC/TRAC/A-TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the rear wheels (2WD models) or all wheels (4WD models) spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that VSC/
TRAC/A-TRAC have been engaged.
236
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable VSC or TRAC (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC or TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■
TRAC OFF mode
Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.
The slip and AUTO LSD indicators will come on.
The system is in TRAC off, AUTO
LSD on and VSC on mode.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
■
AUTO LSD mode
Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the TRAC OFF mode.
The slip, VSC OFF and AUTO
LSD indicators will come on.
The system is in TRAC off, AUTO
LSD on and VSC off mode.
■
VSC OFF mode
Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds, when the system is in the AUTO LSD mode.
The slip and VSC OFF indicators will come on.
The system is all off mode.
237
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable VSC or A-TRAC (4H mode on 4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC or A-TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■
A-TRAC OFF mode
Press the VSC OFF switch briefly.
The slip indicator will come on.
The system is in A-TRAC of engine control off and VSC on mode.
This mode can be used when the transfer mode is 4H mode and the center differential is unlocked.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
■
VSC OFF mode
Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.
The slip and VSC OFF indicators will come on.
The system is all off mode.
238
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable A-TRAC (4L mode on 4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, A-TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Stop the vehicle completely, and press the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds.
The slip indicator will come on.
The system is in all off mode.
Push the switch again to turn the system back on.
2
■
Automatic A-TRAC reactivation (A-TRAC OFF mode)
With A-TRAC OFF mode, slip indicator turn on. The A-TRAC system will turn on when the vehicle speed increases.
■
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, A-TRAC, VSC and brake assist system
●
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started and just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■
If the brake system overheats
TRAC or A-TRAC will cease operation, and the slip indicator will change from flashing to being on continuously to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)
239
2-4. Using other driving systems
■
Shifting to 4L position
The VSC OFF indicator will come on.
If the center differential is locked, VSC is automatically turned off.
■
Power steering system operation sound
When you turn the engine switch to ON after the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, a sound may be heard from the engine compartment.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or serious injury.
■
The ABS does not operate effectively when
●
The limits of the gripping performance have been exceeded.
●
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
●
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●
When driving with tire chains
●
When driving over bumps in the road
●
When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■
When VSC is activated
The slip indicator flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes.
■
TRAC or A-TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if TRAC or A-TRAC is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
240
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■
Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
2
241
2-5. Driving information
Off-road precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle feature
●
Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
●
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.
●
It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
242
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
●
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
●
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
●
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
●
When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
●
Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
2
243
2-5. Driving information
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.
●
Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
●
Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.
●
Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
●
Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
■
Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.
●
State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●
State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●
Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
244
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
●
Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
●
Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●
Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.
●
After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
●
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●
When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
2
245
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■
To prevent the water damage
●
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.
●
Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
●
Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
●
Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
■
When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.
■
Inspection after off-road driving
●
Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
●
Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
246
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.
●
Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
●
Be sure all items are secured in place.
●
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
2
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity)
(Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400
750 (5
150)
= 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
247
2-5. Driving information
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B lb. (kg)
A lb. (kg) = C lb. (kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg)
D lb. (kg) = E lb. (kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
248
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.
●
Receptacles containing gasoline
●
Aerosol cans
■
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●
Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.
●
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
●
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■
Capacity and distribution
●
Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
2
249
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Capacity and distribution
●
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
■
Roof luggage carrier precautions
To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
●
Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.
●
If loading long or wide cargo never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.
(
●
Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
●
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.
●
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
●
Do not exceed 150 lb. (68 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
■
Cross rail adjustment
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them.
Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of emergency braking or a collision.
250
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.
■
Total load capacity: (
P. 623)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
■
Seating capacity:
With separated type second seat—
7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 5)
With bench type second seat—
8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.
■
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): (
P. 261, 623)
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
■
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
2
■
Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (
251
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
252
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■
Pre-winter preparations
●
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●
Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.
●
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
■
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
●
Do not try to forcibly open a window, scrape an outside rear view mirror surface or move a wiper or outside rear view mirror that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
●
Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●
Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
2
253
2-5. Driving information
■
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
■
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
■
Refueling (Flex-fuel vehicles)
Observe the following precautions when switching fuels, in order to maintain starting and driving performance.
●
Do not change fuels when the fuel level is 1/4 or less.
●
Always add at least 2.6 gal. (10 L) of fuel.
●
After fulling up with fuel, warm up the engine or drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes or 7 miles (11 km).
●
Do not accelerate rapidly immediately after refueling.
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
0.2 in. (5 mm) in diameter
Cross chain
0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter
254
2-5. Driving information
Regulations on the use of snow chains
●
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
●
Install the chains on the rear tires.
●
Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
2
■
Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●
Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
●
Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.
CAUTION
■
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
●
Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●
Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h) regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
●
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
●
4WD models:
Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
255
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.
●
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●
Avoid sudden turns and braking.
●
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
NOTICE
■
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■
Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
256
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as towing kits, etc.
2
257
2-5. Driving information
Towing related terms
■
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).
■
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.
258
2-5. Driving information
■
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Front GAWR
The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).
Rear GAWR
2
■
TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
(With brakes)
The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, towing package
(if available), hitch and hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed
GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
259
2-5. Driving information
■
Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
(Without brakes)
The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.
■
Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. (
260
2-5. Driving information
Weight limits
●
The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in the table. (
●
The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR described in the table. (
●
The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification
Label.
●
The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.
●
If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.
●
If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.
●
If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
2
261
2-5. Driving information
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
■
GCWR
*
and TWR
*
Model code
*1
Engine
Driving system
GCWR TWR
UPK60L-GKTSKA
UPK60L-GKTLKA
UPK65L-GKTSKA
UPK65L-GKTLKA
4.6L V8
(1UR-FE) engine
2WD
4WD
13000 lb. (5897 kg)
6900 lb. (3130 kg)
6800 lb. (3084 kg)
6600 lb. (2994 kg)
USK60L-GKTSKA 7400 lb. (3357 kg)
13600 lb. (6169 kg)
USK60L-GKTLKA 2WD 7300 lb. (3311 kg)
USK60L-GKTZKA
USK65L-GKTSKA
5.7L V8
(3UR-FE) engine
13400 lb. (6078 kg)
13600 lb. (6169 kg)
7200 lb. (3266 kg)
7100 lb. (3221 kg)
USK65L-GKTLKA
USK65L-GKTZKA
13500 lb. (6124 kg)
7000 lb. (3175 kg)
4WD
USK65L-GKTSGA
USK65L-GKTLGA
5.7L V8
(3UR-FBE) engine
13600 lb. (6169 kg)
13500 lb. (6124 kg)
7100 lb. (3221 kg)
USK65L-GKTZGA
7000 lb. (3175 kg)
*1
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (
■
Unbraked TWR
*
1000 lb. (453 kg)
262
*
: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.
2-5. Driving information
Trailer Tongue Weight
●
A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
●
To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100
= 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
2
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front fender height above the front axle before connection.
Adjust weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
263
2-5. Driving information
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.
●
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
●
Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.
●
Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
●
Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer.
After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
264
2-5. Driving information
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.
2
Trailer class
Typical trailer ball size
IV 2 5/16 in.
II and III 2 in.
I 1 7/8 in.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2 threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
265
2-5. Driving information
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
Hitch receiver pin hole position: 46.2 in. (1172.3 mm)
Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under the vehicle body.
4 pin, 7 pin connectors
4 pin connector
266
2-5. Driving information
■
Service connector for towing brake controller (with towing package)
Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller as shown.
Access the service connector.
Remove the scuff plate.
Remove the clip (screw type) and trim board.
2
Connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension)
If a height control system is installed in your vehicle, you have to connect and disconnect your trailer more carefully.
●
Connecting
Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.
Turn off the engine, or set the electronically modulated air suspension system to MAN. (manual).
Connect the trailer.
Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.
Press the height control mode select switch to cancel the
MAN. (manual) condition that was set on . Check that the MAN. indicator turns off.
Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.
267
2-5. Driving information
●
Disconnecting
Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.
Set the electronically modulated air suspension system to
MAN. (manual).
Turn off the engine.
Set the supporting leg of the trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4 in. (100 mm).
Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.
Press the height control mode select switch to cancel the
MAN. (manual) condition that was set on . Check that the MAN. indicator turns off.
Wait until vehicle height is stabilized.
Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If the hitch does not disconnect, raise the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 7.
Move the vehicle forward in LO mode where the hitch does not touch anything in N mode.
Set the height control of electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.
268
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
●
Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.
●
Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph
(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
●
Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicletrailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●
Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.
●
Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
●
As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
●
Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
269
2
2-5. Driving information
●
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn.
●
Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.
●
Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
●
Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
●
To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not use the transmission in D.
Transmission shift range position must be in 5 in the S mode.
●
Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
●
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
●
Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(
270
2-5. Driving information
●
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P and turn off the engine.
●
When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.
Shift into D or R (if reversing).
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
2
271
2-5. Driving information
■
Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
■
Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
●
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (
●
Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
●
All trailer lights work as required by law.
●
All lights work each time you connect them.
●
The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
●
The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.
Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●
The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●
The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
●
Depress TOW/HAUL button (if equipped)
272
2-5. Driving information
■
AVS (adaptive variable suspension system) (if equipped)
The suspension can be switched for improvement in driveability. (
■
Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
■
Maintenance
●
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Scheduled Maintenance Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
●
Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■
If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
●
If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize.
●
After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
2
273
2-5. Driving information
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
CAUTION
■
Trailer towing precautions
●
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.
●
Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension: Set the vehicle height to the LO mode and turn off the rear height control air suspension to prevent the vehicle height from automatically changing.
■
To avoid accident or injury
●
Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
●
If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.
●
If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.
●
Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.
●
Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.
●
Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
●
Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
274
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■
To avoid accident or injury
●
Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
●
Do not use cruise control when towing.
●
Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
●
Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
■
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■
When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
●
If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
●
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.
●
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
2
275
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■
When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■
Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
276
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
2
NOTICE
■
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
277
Interior features
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system ........................... 280
Rear air conditioning system ........................... 288
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers....................... 292
Windshield wiper de-icer............................ 294
Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches ......................... 295
audio system ........................... 348
® audio system.................. 351
® enabled portable player ............................. 356
® enabled portable player ............................. 358
audio system setup .............................. 363
Audio system ................... 297
Using the radio................. 301
Using the CD player......... 309
Playing MP3 and WMA discs............................... 318
Operating an iPod ............ 326
USB memory ................. 332
Optimal use of the audio system ........................... 339
Using the AUX port .......... 343
Using the steering wheel audio switches ............... 345
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Rear seat entertainment system ........................... 364
(DVD video) ................... 372
(video CD)...................... 381
(audio CD/CD text) ........ 384
(MP3 discs) .................... 386
Using the video mode ...... 389
Changing the Setup Menu settings .......................... 391
278
Interior features
3
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system features.......................... 399
Using the hands-free phone system ................ 403
Making a phone call ......... 412
Setting a cellular phone ... 416
Security and system setup .............................. 420
Using the phone book ...... 423
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ............... 429
• Personal/interior light main switch .................... 430
• Personal/interior lights ... 431
• Interior light .................... 432
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features .... 433
• Glove boxes................... 434
• Coin holder .................... 435
• Front console box .......... 436
• Card holder .................... 438
• Map holder..................... 439
• Pen holder ..................... 441
• Tissue pocket................. 442
• Rear console box........... 443
• Overhead console.......... 446
• Cup holders ................... 448
• Bottle holders................. 452
• Auxiliary boxes............... 453
Sun visors ........................ 455
Vanity mirrors................... 456
Clock ................................ 457
Outside temperature display............................ 458
Portable ashtray............... 460
Cigarette lighter................ 461
Conversation mirror ......... 462
Power outlets ................... 463
Seat heaters..................... 469
Seat heaters and ventilators ...................... 472
Armrests........................... 474
Rear side sunshades ....... 475
Seatback table ................. 477
Floor mat.......................... 478
Luggage compartment features .......................... 480
Garage door opener......... 485
Compass.......................... 491
279
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Control panel
Windshield defogger
Driver's side temperature control dial
Air conditioning ON/OFF switch
Automatic mode
Air outlet selection dial
Front passenger’s side temperature control dial
Fan speed control dial
Fan OFF switch
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Temperature control for rear passengers
Rear air conditioning ON/OFF switch
Simultaneous mode
280
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Display
Fan speed display
Airflow display
Front passenger’s side temperature setting display
Driver’s side temperature setting display
Temperature setting display for rear passengers
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
The temperature for the driver and passenger seat can be set separately.
3
281
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.
●
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on)
The driver’s side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
●
Individual mode (the indicator on is off)
The temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (
P. 288) can be adjusted separately. Operate the pas-
senger’s side or rear temperature controls to enter individual mode.
■
Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
282
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■
Changing the air outlets
Turn the air outlet selection dial.
The air outlets switch each time either side of air outlet selection dial is turned.
Air flow as shown according to the mode selected.
When the dial is set to flows to the upper body.
, air
3
When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body and feet.
283
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
When the dial is set to flows to the feet.
, air
When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode.
■
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (outside air mode) and culated air mode) each time the switch is pressed.
(recir-
Changing the rear seat settings
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease it.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.
284
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The indicator comes on.
The air conditioning system control operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode.
3
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Driver side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close the vent.
285
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Passenger side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close the vent.
■
Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●
Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●
Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.
■
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode
286
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■
When outside temperature approaches 32
F (0
C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
■
When the indicator on flashes
is pressed.
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■
Air conditioning odors
●
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
●
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
3
CAUTION
■
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.
287
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Automatic mode
Temperature setting display
Airflow control
Off
Temperature control for rear passengers
Fan speed control
■
Button lock function
During Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on), the rear air conditioning system buttons will be automatically locked.
(
appears on the display when the buttons are locked.
To unlock the buttons, choose the Individual mode (the indicator on
is off). (
288
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The indicator comes on.
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.
Press decrease it.
to increase the temperature and to
Adjusting the settings
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and
■
Changing the air outlets
Press the desired ,
or
.
to decrease it.
3
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
When
is pressed, air flows to the upper body.
The indicator comes on.
289
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
When
is pressed, air flows to the upper body and feet.
The indicator comes on.
When
is pressed, air flows to the feet.
The indicator comes on.
■
Adjusting the fan speed
Press the (decrease
increase) button.
The indicator comes on.
Press to turn the fan off.
290
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
3
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.
291
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
Press the button to turn on the rear window defogger. The indicator will come on. The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defoggers off.
■
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.
: If equipped
292
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
3
293
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
On/off
Press the button to turn on the windshield wiper de-icer. The indicator will come on. The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
■
The de-icer can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
■
When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
: If equipped
294
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches
Some air conditioning features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Temperature control
OFF
Automatic mode
3
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.
Press “
” on to increase the temperature and “
” to decrease the temperature.
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “
” on the temperature.
to increase the temperature and “
” to decrease
: If equipped
295
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Turning off the fan
Press .
296
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Without navigation system
Type A: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio
3
Type B: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
297
3-2. Using the audio system
Type C: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio
298
Title
Using the radio
Using the CD player
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Operating an iPod
Operating a USB memory
Optimal use of the audio system
Using the AUX port
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Page
3-2. Using the audio system
Language settings (type B and C)
The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and messages may be changed.
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “LANG”.
Press that corresponds to the desired language.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)
For vehicles sold in Canada
“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)
3
■
Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
299
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
●
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.
●
Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■
To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
300
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Type A
Power Volume
Station selector
Seeking the frequency
Changing the channel
Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel
(SAT mode)
AM
SAT/FM mode buttons
Scanning for receivable stations
Type B and C
Power Volume
Station selector
Displaying radio text messages
3
Seeking the frequency
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)
Selecting the preset station pages
Changing the channel
Silencing a sound
AM/FM/SAT mode button
Displaying radio text messages
Scanning for receivable stations
301
3-2. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM
®
Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning or or pressing “
” or “
” on .
Press and hold a button (from until you hear a beep.
Type B and C:
to or one of
Each time total of 6 pages.
is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a
)
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM
®
Satellite Radio)
■
Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press
■
Scanning all radio stations within range
again.
Press .
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press again.
302
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Displaying radio text messages (for type B and C, FM mode only)
When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on the display. To display the message, press .
If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Text messages are not displayed while driving.
XM
®
Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■
Receiving XM
®
Satellite Radio
3
The display changes as follows each time pressed.
Type A
AM
SAT1
SAT2
SAT3
Type B and C
AM
FM
SAT
Turn or
or is
to select the desired channel in all the categories or press “
” or “
” on channel in the current category.
to select the desired
303
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Setting XM
®
Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (from to or one of ) until you hear a beep.
Type B and C:
Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a total of 6 pages.
■
Changing the channel category
Press “
” or “
” on .
■
Scanning XM
®
Satellite Radio channels
●
Scanning channels in the current category
Press .
again.
When the desired channel is reached, press
●
Scanning the preset channels
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press again.
304
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Displaying text information
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Type A
Channel name
Title (song/program title)
Name (artist name/feature)
Channel number.
Type B and C
Title (song/program title)
Title (song/program title)
Name (artist name/ feature).
3
305
3-2. Using the audio system
■
When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased. (type A only)
■
Reception sensitivity
●
Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM
®
Satellite Radio.
●
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear quarter windows. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear quarter windows.
■
XM
®
Satellite Radio
An XM
®
Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●
XM
®
subscriptions
For detailed information about XM
U.S.A.
®
Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●
Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM
®
service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using
or
, and the receiver’s
8-character ID number will appear.
●
Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM
®
Satellite Radio.
306
3-2. Using the audio system
■
If XM
®
Satellite Radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM
®
tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA or
CHECK
ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
The XM
®
antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM
®
antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM
®
Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM
®
Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM
®
Satellite Radio.
The XM
®
signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR or
CHANNEL OFF
AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at this time. No action needed.
3
307
3-2. Using the audio system
---
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM
®
Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada)
■
Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●
Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●
Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
●
Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
308
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Type A
Power Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Reverse
Fast-forward
CD eject
Selecting a track
Type B and C
Power Volume
Playback
Searching playback
Displaying text messages
Selector buttons
CD eject
CD load
(type B only)
3
Fast-forwarding and reversing/
Selecting a track
Selecting a track
Playback
Searching playback
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
309
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading CDs
■
Loading a CD (type A and C)
Insert a CD.
■
Loading a CD (type B)
Press .
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD.
■
Loading multiple CDs (type B only)
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a CD.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again, insert the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
310
3-2. Using the audio system
Ejecting CDs
■
Ejecting a CD (type A and C)
Press and remove the CD.
■
Ejecting a CD (type B)
To select the CD to be ejected, press that corresponds to “ ” or “ ”.
The selected CD number is shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
■
Ejecting all the CDs (type B only)
Press and hold
CDs.
until you hear a beep, and then remove the
3
Selecting a track
Turn or desired track.
or press “
” or “
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Type A
” on to select the
Type B and C
Press and hold “
” or “
” on .
311
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a CD (type B only)
■
Selecting a CD to play
Press that corresponds to “ ” or “ ”.
■
Scanning loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks (type B and C)
Press .
312
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
■
Current CD
Press or that corresponds to “RDM”.
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.
■
All CDs (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
■
Repeating a track
Press or that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button again.
■
Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
3
313
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Type A
Track no./Elapsed time
CD title
Track name.
Type B and C
Track title
Track name/Artist name
Track name/Elapsed time.
■
Display (type A only)
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
for 1 second
If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■
Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”:Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
314
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
■
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
3
315
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio: CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)
●
Low-quality and deformed CDs
●
CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area
●
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off
316
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
●
Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●
Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●
Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●
Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●
Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
3
317
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Power Volume
Reversing
Fast-forwarding
Selecting a file
Random playback
Repeat play
Type B and C
Power Volume
CD eject
Selecting a folder
Displaying text messages
Searching playback
Playback
Selector buttons
CD eject
CD load
(type B only)
Selecting a folder
318
Fast-forwarding and reversing/
Selecting a file
Selecting a file
Playback
Searching playback
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (type B only)
Selecting and scanning a folder
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press “
” or “
” on to select the desired folder.
■
Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press
■
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “
” on until you hear a beep.
again.
Selecting and scanning files
■
Selecting one file at a time
Turn or or press “
” or “
” on to select the desired file.
■
Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press .
When the desired file is reached, press once again.
3
319
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Type A
Type B and C
Press and hold “
” or “
” on .
Playing and pausing files (type B and C)
Press .
Random playback
■
Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press or that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the button again.
■
Playing all of the files on a disc in random order (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
320
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■
Repeating a file
Press or that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button again.
■
Repeating all of the files in a folder
Type A
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B and C
Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
■
Repeating all of the files in a disc (type B only)
Press that corresponds to “RPT” three times.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Type A
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time
Folder name
File name
Album title (MP3 only)
Track title
Artist name.
Type B and C
Track title
Track title/Artist name
Track title/Album name
Track title/Elapsed time.
321
3
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Display
■
Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”:Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played.
■
Discs that can be used
■
CD player protection feature
■
If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
■
Lens cleaners
322
3-2. Using the audio system
■
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media
®
Audio) is a Microsoft
®
audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.
●
MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●
WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●
Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
3
323
3-2. Using the audio system
●
Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●
Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●
MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.
324
3-2. Using the audio system
●
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●
Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft
®
, Windows
®
, and Windows Media
®
are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
3
NOTICE
■
CDs and adapters that cannot be used (
■
CD player precautions (
325
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■
Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
Press .
■
Control panel
Power Volume
Selector buttons
326
Fast-forwarding and reversing/
Selecting a song
Playback
Selector knob
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
: If equipped
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
Press that corresponds to “BROWSE” to select iPod menu mode.
Press
■
Play mode list
that corresponds to the desired play mode.
Play mode
PLIST
ARTIST
ALBUM
First selection
Playlist select
Artist select
Albums select
Second selection
Songs select
Albums select
Songs select
Third selection
-
Songs select
-
Fourth selection
-
-
-
GENRE Genre select Artists select
Albums select
Songs select
SONGS
PODCST
COMPSR
BOOK
Songs select
Albums select
Composers select
Songs select
-
Songs select
Albums select
-
-
-
Songs select
-
-
-
-
-
Depending on the model, the name of your iPod may be displayed at the top of the list.
3
327
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing selection list.
that corresponds to “MORE” changes to the second
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.
To return to the previous selection list, press that corresponds to “ ”.
Selecting songs from a song list
Press that corresponds to “LIST”.
The current playlist is displayed.
Turning to select the desired song.
Press screen.
Selecting songs
returns the screen from list display to the previous
Turn song.
or press “
” or “
Playing and pausing songs
” on
Press .
to select the desired
328
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
Press and hold “
” or “
” on .
Shuffle playback
■
Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
■
Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
3
Repeat play
Press that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button again.
Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the last song has ended.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title
Track title/Artist name
Track title/Album name
Track title/Elapsed time
329
3-2. Using the audio system
■
About iPod
●
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■
iPod functions
●
When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point at which it was last used.
●
Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■
iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■
Error messages
“IPOD ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the iPod, inside the USB box or the connection between them.
“NO SONGS”:This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“UPDATE YOUR IPOD”:This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.
330
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Compatible models
iPod
Model iPod nano
Generation
5th generation
1st generation
2nd generation
3rd generation
1st generation
1st generation
Software version
Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
Ver. 1.0.0 or higher iPod touch iPod classic
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●
Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
●
Maximum number of songs in device: 65,025
●
Maximum number of songs per list: 65,025
3
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to iPod
●
Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
331
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
■
Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.
Press .
■
Control panel
Power Volume
Selector buttons Selecting a folder
332
Playback/ pause
Fast-forwarding and reversing/
Playback
Selecting a file Selecting a file
Displaying text messages
Searching playback
: If equipped
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■
Selecting a folder
Press “
” or “
” on to select the desired folder.
■
Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold “
” on until you hear a beep.
■
Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting and scanning files
■
Selecting a file
Turn or press “
” or “
” on file.
■
Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
to select the desired
To cancel, press again.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
3
333
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing and pausing files
Press .
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
Press and hold “
” or “
” on .
Random playback
■
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
■
Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press that corresponds to “RDM” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
■
Repeating a file
Press that corresponds to “RPT”.
To cancel, press the button twice.
■
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press that corresponds to “RPT” twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
334
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title
Track title/Artist name
Track title/Album name
Track title/Elapsed time
■
USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■
Error messages
“USB ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the USB memory, in the USB box or connection between them.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
■
USB memory
●
Compatible device
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.
●
Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows
®
)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
3
335
3-2. Using the audio system
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in device: 65,025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
●
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media
®
Audio) is a Microsoft
®
audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●
MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●
WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
336
3-2. Using the audio system
●
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●
MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged, all files in the
USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
●
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●
Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft
®
, Windows
®
, and Windows Media
®
are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
3
337
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not connect a USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to a USB memory
●
Do not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
338
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Type B and C
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
3
Selector knob
Selector buttons
Menu button
339
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
■
Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following order:
“BAS”
“TRE”
“FAD”
“BAL”
“ASL”
Type B and C
Press .
Press that corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “MID” (type B only), “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”
■
Adjusting sound quality
Type A
Turning adjusts the level.
Mode displayed
BAS
TRE
FAD
BAL
Sound quality mode
Bass*
Treble*
Front/rear volume balance
Left/right volume balance
Level
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear
L7 to R7
Turn to the left
Low
Turn to the right
High
Shifts to front
Shifts to left Shifts to right
*:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CD mode.
340
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B and C
Turning adjusts the level.
Mode displayed
BASS
MID
TREB
FADE
BAL
Sound quality mode
Bass*
Mid-range*
(type B only)
Treble*
Front/rear volume balance
Left/right volume balance
Level
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear
L7 to R7
Turn to the left
Low
Turn to the right
High
Shifts to front
Shifts to left Shifts to right
*:The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
■
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Type A
3
When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the
“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.
341
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B and C
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “ASL”.
Press that corresponds to the desired mode.
Type B: “ON” or “OFF”
Type C: “LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.
■
Setting the number of preset pages (type B and C)
The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial setting is 6 pages.
Press .
Press that corresponds to “MORE”.
Press that corresponds to “PRESET”.
Press that corresponds to the desired number of preset pages.
■
Language settings (type B and C)
342
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
Type A
3
Type B and C
343
3-2. Using the audio system
■
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.
344
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Increases/decreases volume
Radio mode: Selects radio station
CD mode: Selects track/file, folder and disc iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file and folder
Bluetooth
®
audio mode:
Selects a track and album
RSE mode: Selects track/ file and chapter
Turns the power on, selects an audio source
3
: If equipped
345
3-2. Using the audio system
Turning the power on
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a beep.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
Type B:
FM
SAT
CD changer
RSE*
Bluetooth
®
audio
AUX
USB/iPod
AM
Type C:
FM
SAT
CD
Bluetooth
®
audio
AUX
USB/iPod
AM
*: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on volume.
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the
Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press “
” or “
” on to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “
” or “
” on until you hear a beep.
346
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
Press to select the CD, iPod, USB memory, Bluetooth
® audio or RSE mode.
Press “
” or “
” on song.
to select the desired track/file or
Selecting a folder or album
Press to select the CD, USB memory or Bluetooth
®
audio mode.
Press and hold “
” or “
” on until you hear a beep.
3
Selecting a disc in the CD player (type B only)
Press to select the CD mode.
Press and hold “
” or “
” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or chapter (vehicles with rear seat entertainment system)
Press to select the RSE mode.
Press “
” or “
” on to select the desired track/file or chapter.
CAUTION
■
To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
347
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Bluetooth
®
audio system
The Bluetooth
® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth
®
, the Bluetooth
®
audio system will not function.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Title
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Bluetooth
®
audio system setup
Page
■
Conditions under which the system will not operate
●
If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth
®
●
If the portable player is switched off
●
If the portable player is not connected
●
If the portable player’s battery is low
●
If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
●
If metal is covering or touching the portable player
■
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (
: If equipped
348
■
About Bluetooth
®
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■
Compatible models
●
Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 1.2
●
Following Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth
®
audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■
Certification for the Bluetooth
®
audio system
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
349
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
CAUTION
■
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.
■
Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
350
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
■
Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.
Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected item
Bluetooth
®
connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth
®
audio system cannot be used.
3
■
Microphone
351
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following the voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth
®
audio system without the need to check the display or operate .
■
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.
■
Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth
®
audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
352
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth
®
audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player:
Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or
Register a portable player name by either of the following methods:
.
3 a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth
®
phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. (
353
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Menu list of the Bluetooth
®
audio system
■
Normal operation
First menu
Second menu
Third menu Operation detail
“Setup”
“BT
•
A
Setup”
“System
Setup”
“Pair Audio
Player”
“Select Audio
Player”
“Change Name”
“List Audio Players”
“Set Passkey”
“Delete Audio”
“Guidance Volume”
“Device Name”
Registering a portable player
Selecting a portable player to be used
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Listing the registered portable players
Changing the passkey
Deleting a registered portable player
Setting voice guidance volume
Displaying the Bluetooth
® device address and name
Initializing the system “Initialize”
“BT•A Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or saying the voice command, “Cancel”.
354
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
■
When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■
The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:
●
When driving on rough roads
●
When driving at high speeds
●
When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●
When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
●
Operating the system with
●
Registering a portable player to the system
■
Changing the passkey
3
355
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Power Volume
Selecting an album
Selector buttons
Fast-forwarding and reversing/
Selecting a track
Selecting a track
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
Playback
Selecting an album
Press “
” or “
” on
Selecting tracks
.
Turn track.
or press “
” or “
Playing and pausing tracks
” on
Press .
to select the desired
356
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Press and hold “
” or “
” on .
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Track title
Track title/Artist name
Track title/Album name
Track title/Elapsed time
3
Using the steering wheel audio switches
■
Bluetooth
®
audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
■
Error messages
“BT AUDIO ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the system.
357
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth
®
audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
■
Functions and operation procedures
Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press that corresponds to “SETUP”.
Select one of the following functions using a voice command or .
●
Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player”
●
Selecting a portable player to be used
“Select Audio Player”
●
Changing the registered name
“Change Name”
●
Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players”
●
Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
●
Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or , and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (
358
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
: a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio”, and
3 select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the engine switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON” position.
359
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
, Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
. The
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available:
●
Selecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”
●
Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
●
Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
360
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary.
3
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or .
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
: a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth
®
phone, the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.
A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
361
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
■
The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
362
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Bluetooth
®
audio system setup
■
System setup items and operation procedures
●
Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Guidance Volume”
(
●
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Device Name”
(
●
Initialization
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Initialize”
(
3
363
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Rear seat entertainment system
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.
364
Front audio system
DVD player
Display
Rear seat entertainment system remote controller
A/V input port (
Power outlet (
Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks
: If equipped
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Opening and closing the display
Press the lock release button to open the display.
Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90
and
125
).
To close the display, push the display up until a click is heard.
The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.
3
Loading a disc
Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up.
The DISC indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.
The player will play the track or chapter, and will repeat it after it reaches the end.
365
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Ejecting a disc
Press and remove the disc.
Turning the rear seat entertainment system power on/off
■
Operating from the front audio system
Selecting either the front audio system or DVD player audio for the speakers
Press that corresponds to “OFF”, to turn off the rear seat entertainment system.
Press that corresponds to
“ON”, to turn on the rear seat entertainment system.
366
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Setting the rear seat entertainment system lock
Front audio system
Selecting either the front audio system or DVD player audio for the speakers
Selecting “LOCK” or
“UNLOCK” for the rear seat entertainment system
The rear seat entertainment system lock remains on, even when the engine switch is turned off.
3
DVD player display
Headphone jacks
To use headphones, connect them to the jack.
To adjust the volume
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
367
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
The rear seat entertainment system can be used when
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
■
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■
When appears on the screen
It indicates that the selected switch cannot work.
■
Error messages
“DISC CHECK”: Indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
“REGION CODE ERROR”:Indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
“DVD ERROR”: Indicates that there is a problem inside the player.
Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take the vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
368
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Before using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners)
Remove the cover.
Remove the insulating sheet.
■
When the remote controller batteries are fully depleted
Remove the depleted batteries and install
3 new AA batteries.
3
■
If the remote controller batteries are discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●
The rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly.
●
The operational range is reduced.
■
When replacing the AA batteries
Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Toyota dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
369
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Headphones
With some headphones generally available in the market, sound quality may be poor. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless headphones.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
■
Volume
●
Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.
●
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the
DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.
CAUTION
■
While driving
Do not use headphones.
Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■
When the rear seat entertainment system is not used
Keep the display closed.
In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant’s body, resulting in injury.
■
To prevent accidents and electric shock
Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller.
■
When the remote controller is not used
Stow the remote controller.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■
Removed batteries and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
370
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
NOTICE
■
For normal operation after replacing the batteries
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●
Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller.
●
Do not bend any of the battery terminals.
3
371
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Using the DVD player (DVD video)
■
Remote controller
Turning on the DVD mode
Turning on/off the control icon screen
Selecting a chapter
Reversing a disc
Turning on the menu screen
Turning on the title selection screen
Searching the title
Changing the screen angle
Inputting the selected control icon
Turning off the screen
Selecting a control icon
Playing/pausing a disc
Fast-forwarding a disc
Stopping a disc
Changing the subtitle language
Changing the audio language
372
■
Unit
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Ejecting a disc
Turning on the DVD mode
Skipping to the desired chapter
Playing/pausing a disc
Turning on/off the control icon screen
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
3
373
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Control icon screen (Page1)
■
Control icon screen (Page2)
Turning off the control icon screen on the screen
Displaying control icon screen page 2
Turning on/off the title selection screen for the disc
Turning on/off the menu screen for the disc
Reversing a disc
Stopping a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Fast-forwarding a disc
Displaying the initial setting screen
Displaying control icon screen page 1
Searching the title
Returning to the previous screen
Changing the audio language
Changing the subtitle language
Changing the angle
374
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Operating from the front audio system
Press: Selecting a chapter
Press and hold: Fast-forwarding/reversing a disc
Stopping/playing a disc
Selecting the DVD mode
Starting a disc
Displaying a elapsed time
Playing/pausing a disc
NOTICE
■
Cleaning the screen
Wipe the screen with a dry soft cloth.
If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.
■
To prevent damage to the remote controller
●
Keep the remote controller away from direct sunlight, heat and high humidity.
●
Do not drop or knock the remote controller against hard objects.
●
Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller.
■
DVD player
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot.
3
375
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Turning on/off the control icon screen
Press
Press icon screen.
or
or
to turn on the control icon screen.
once again or select to turn off the control
Turning on the title selection screen
Press or select to turn on the title selection screen. For the operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Turning on the menu screen
Press or select to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Returning to the previous screen
Select to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Searching for a title
Press or select to display the screen to search for a title.
Select the title number, and press
or to input it.
Select vious screen.
to return to the pre-
376
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Changing the subtitle language
Press or select to display the subtitle language screen.
Each time is pressed or
is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.
Select vious screen.
to return to the pre-
3
Changing the audio language
Press or select to display the audio language screen.
Each time is pressed or
is selected, another language stored on the disc is selected.
Select vious screen.
to return to the pre-
377
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Changing the angle
Press or select to display the screen to change the angle.
Each time is pressed or
is selected, the angle changes.
Select vious screen.
to return to the pre-
■
DVD player and DVD video discs
This DVD player is compatible with NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.
■
Region codes
Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use them. If the DVD video disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the
DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases you cannot use it.
378
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Marks shown on DVD video discs
Indicates NTSC format of color TV.
Indicates the number of audio tracks.
Indicates the number of language subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
Indicates the screen to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in which this video disc can be played.
All: all countries
Number: region code
■
DVD video disc glossary
●
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that hold world’s standard video.
DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/
40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been adopted in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format. Audio data is stored using PCM and
Dolby digital, which enables higher sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
●
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.
• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
• Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
3
379
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
●
Multi-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different angles.
●
Multi-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles and audio.
●
Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the
DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player.
●
Audio: This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby digital, dts and
MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.
●
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided into sections by title and chapter.
●
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
●
Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters.
■
Audio
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby
Digital”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Confidential unpublished works.
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
380
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Using the DVD player (video CD)
■
Remote controller
■
Unit
Turning on the DVD mode
Turning on/off the control icon screen
Selecting a chapter
Reversing a disc
Searching the disc menu number
Inputting the selected control icon
Turning off the screen
Selecting a control icon
Playing/pausing a disc
Fast-forwarding a disc
Stopping a disc
Changing the initial setting
3
Ejecting a disc
Turning on the DVD mode
Skipping to the desired chapter
Playing/pausing a disc
Turning on/off the control icon screen
Selecting a control icon
Inputting the selected control icon
381
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Control icon screen (Page1)
■
Control icon screen (Page2)
Selecting a disc menu number
Turning off the menu screen
Displaying control icon screen page 2
Turning on the disc menu
Returning to the previous page screen (with the disc menu displayed)
Proceeding to the next page screen (with the disc menu displayed)
Changing to a multiplex transmission
Displaying control icon screen page 1
Reversing a disc
Playing/pausing a disc
Fast-forwarding a disc
382
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Operating from the front audio system
Press: Selecting a chapter
Press and hold: Fast-forwarding/reversing a disc
Stopping/playing a disc
Selecting the DVD mode
Starting a disc
Displaying a elapsed time
Playing/pausing a disc
Selecting a disc menu number
Select to display the disc menu number search screen.
Select the disc menu number, and press
Select to return to the previous screen.
or to input it.
3
383
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Using the DVD player (audio CD/CD text)
■
Control screen
Press or play the control screen.
to dis-
Repeat play
Random playback
Search playback
■
Operating from the front audio system
Press: Selecting a track
Press and hold: Fast-forwarding/reversing a disc
Selecting the DVD mode
Displaying a elapsed time
Playing/pausing a disc
Random playback
(
Repeat play (
Repeat play
■
Repeating a track
Select .
Random playback
■
Playing all of the tracks on a CD in random order
Select .
384
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Search playback
■
Scanning tracks
Select .
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
Select again when the desired track is reached.
■
Canceling repeat play and random playback
or again.
3
385
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Using the DVD player (MP3 discs)
■
Control screen
Press or play the control screen.
to dis-
Repeat play
Random playback
Search playback
Displaying file information
Selecting a folder
■
Operating from the front audio system
Press: Selecting a file
Press and hold: Fast-forwarding/reversing a file
Selecting the DVD mode
Displaying a elapsed time
Playing/pausing a disc
Random playback
(
Repeat play (
Repeat play
■
Repeating a file
Select .
■
Repeating all of the files in the folder
Select , and press and hold or .
386
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Random playback
■
Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Select .
■
Playing all of the files on a disc in random order
Select , and press and hold or .
Selecting and scanning folders
■
Selecting folders one at a time
To select the desired folder, select or .
■
Scanning the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
3
Select , and press and hold or .
The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, select again.
once
Scanning files
■
Scanning the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Select .
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
When the desired file is reached, select once again.
Displaying file information.
Select .
387
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
Canceling repeat play and random playback
Select or once again.
388
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Using the video mode
Press or the video mode.
to select
Before switching to the video mode, connect the audio source to the A/V input port.
Using the A/V input port
Open the cover.
The A/V input port is composed of
3 input adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
White: Left channel audio input adapter
Red: Right channel audio input adapter
3
■
A/V input port
The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audiovisual equipment is connected to the A/V input port. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
■
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used to connect the audio-visual device. (
389
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
NOTICE
■
When the A/V input port is not in use
Keep the A/V input port cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a short circuit.
390
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Changing the Setup Menu settings
Press or select to display the initial setting screen.
The following settings can be customized here.
●
Audio language
●
Subtitle language
●
DVD language
●
Angle mark
●
Parental lock
3
Changing the audio language
Select .
Select the language you want to hear, and press input it.
or to
391
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (
Select a number, and press
or to input it.
If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen.
Changing the subtitle language
Select .
Select the language you would like to read, and press
to input it.
or
Select if you cannot find the language you would like to read.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (
Select a number, and press
or to input it.
If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen.
392
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Changing the DVD language
Select .
Select the language you would like to hear and press
to input it.
or
Select if you cannot find the language you would like to hear.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. (
Select a number, and press
3
or to input it.
If a code that is not in the list is entered, “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen.
Turning on/off the angle mark
The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible.
Each time you press angle mark turns on or off.
or when is selected, the
393
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Setting viewer restriction levels
Setting a personal code allows the viewer restriction to be used.
Select .
Enter a personal code and press
or .
The setting cannot be changed unless a personal code is entered.
When you forget a personal code, initialize a personal code.
(
Select a restriction level (1-8), and press or . The smaller the level number, the stricter the restrictions.
Initializing all menus
Select .
Turning off the Setup Menu screen
Select .
394
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Setting the display mode
Pressing changes the display mode sequentially as follows:
Normal
Wide 1
Wide 2
Returning to the previous screen
Select to return to the previous screen.
3
395
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
■
To initialize the password
Press on the remote controller or unit ten times when the Enter Personal
Code screen is displayed.
■
Language code list
2608
1412
1620
1922
1821
1115
0512
0101
Code
0514
0618
0405
0920
0519
0102
0106
0113
0118
0119
0125
0126
0201
0205
0207
Language
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Chinese
Dutch
Portuguese
Swedish
Russian
Korean
Greek
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
0301
0315
0319
0325
0401
0426
0515
0520
Code
0208
0209
0214
0215
0218
0521
0601
0609
0610
0615
0625
0701
0704
0712
0714
Language
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots-Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
396
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian
Malagasy
Maori
Language
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
1125
1201
1214
1215
1220
1222
1307
1309
1023
1101
1111
1112
1113
1114
1119
1121
0901
0905
0911
0914
0919
0923
1001
1009
Code
0721
0801
0809
0818
0821
0825
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
Language
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Romanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Sinhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
1901
1904
1907
1908
1909
1911
1912
1913
1601
1612
1619
1721
1813
1814
1815
1823
1320
1325
1401
1405
1415
1503
1513
1518
Code
1311
1312
1314
1315
1318
1319
3
397
3-4. Using the rear audio/video system
1921
1923
2001
2005
2007
2008
2009
2011
2012
Code
1914
1915
1917
1918
1919
1920
■
Adjusting the screen
Language
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Code
2014
2015
2018
2019
2020
2023
2111
2118
2126
2209
2215
2315
2408
2515
2621
Language
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Press .
Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color, and make adjustments. Press
or or to input it.
Brightness
Contrast
“-” or “Red”
Darkens
Weakens the contrast
“+” or “Green”
Brightens
Strengthens the contrast
Tone *
Color *
Weakens the tone
Strengthens the red color
Strengthens the tone
Strengthens the green color
* : The screen tone and color can be adjusted in DVD or video mode.
398
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system features
This system supports Bluetooth
®
, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
■
Hands-free system quick guide
Setting a cellular phone. (
Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be stored). (
Dialing by inputting a name. (
3
: If equipped
399
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
400
Title
Using the hands-free phone system
■
Operating the system by using a voice command
■
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
■
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
Making a phone call
■
Dialing by inputting a number
■
Dialing by inputting a name
■
Speed dialing
■
When receiving a phone call
■
Transferring a call
■
Using the call history memory
Setting a cellular phone
■
Registering a cellular phone
■
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
■
Changing a registered name
■
Listing the registered cellular phones
■
Changing the passkey
■
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
Security and system setup
■
Setting or changing the PIN
■
Locking or unlocking the phone book
■
Setting voice guidance volume
■
Initialization
Using the phone book
■
Adding a new phone number
■
Setting speed dials
■
Changing a registered name
■
Deleting registered data
■
Deleting speed dials
■
Listing the registered data
Page
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Conditions affecting operation
The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situations:
●
The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.
●
The cellular phone has a low battery.
●
The cellular phone is not connected to the system.
●
The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal material covers or touches the phone.
■
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed.
■
Required profiles for the cellular phone
●
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
●
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
■
For detailed information about Hands-free Phone System
For assistance with pairing and operating your cell phone, go to the website www.toyota.letstalk.com.
■
About Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
3
■
Certification for the hands-free phone system
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
401
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
CAUTION
■
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all times during use.
■
Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth
®
phone.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become high resulting in damage to the phone.
402
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the hands-free phone system
■
Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters, such as an umlaut, cannot be displayed.
Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected item
Bluetooth
®
connection condition and reception level
If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.
3
403
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Steering wheel
Type A
Volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off
(press and hold)
404
Type B
■
Microphone
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off
(press and hold)
3
405
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system by using a voice command
By following the voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate .
■
Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.
■
Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .
406
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
Registration to the hands-free phone system only
.
Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or .
Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth
® audio system at the same time
Select “Internal Audio (Int. Audio)” using a voice command or
3
.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
407
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■
Normal operation
First menu
Second menu
Third menu
“Callback”
“Redial”
-
-
-
-
Operation detail
Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory
Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory
“Dial by number”
“Dial by name”
-
-
-
-
Dialing by inputting a number
Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book
“Phonebook”
“Add
Entry”
“Change
Name”
“Delete
Entry”
“Delete
Speed
Dial”
“List
Names”
“Set
Speed
Dial”
(Speed
Dial)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Adding a new number
Changing a name in the phone book
Deleting the phone book data
Deleting a registered speed dial
Listing the phone book data
Registering a speed dial
408
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
First menu
“Setup”
Second menu
“Security”
“Phone
Setup”
“System
Setup”
Third menu Operation detail
“Set PIN”
“Phonebook
Lock”
“Phonebook
Unlock”
Setting a PIN code
Locking the phone book
Unlocking the phone book
“Pair Phone”
“Change
Name”
“Delete
Phone”
“List phones”
Listing the registered cellular phones
“Select phone”
Selecting a cellular phone to be used
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Hands-free power”
Setting the hands-free power on/off
“Guidance
Volume”
“Device
Name”
“Initialize”
Registering the cellular phone to be used
Changing a registered name of a cellular phone
Deleting a registered cellular phone
Setting voice guidance volume
Displaying device information
Initialization
3
409
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Using a short cut key
First menu Second menu
“Dial XXX (name)”
“Dial XXX (number)”
“Phone book add entry”
“Phone book change name”
-
-
-
-
Operation detail
Dialing a number registered in the phone book
Dialing the input numbers
Adding a new number
Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book
Deleting phone book data
“Phone book delete entry”
“Phone book set speed dial”
“Phone book delete speed dial”
“Phonebook”
-
Registering a speed dial
Deleting a speed dial
“Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book
“Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book
410
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■
When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
(star), and + (plus).
Say a command correctly and clearly.
■
The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:
●
When driving on a rough road
●
When driving at high speeds
●
When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●
When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
3
●
Operating the system with
●
Registering a cellular phone to the system
■
Changing the passkey
411
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
■
Making a phone call
●
Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
●
Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
●
Speed dialing
●
Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
●
Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
■
Receiving a phone call
●
Answering the phone
●
Refusing the call
■
Transferring a call
■
Using the call history memory
●
Dialing
●
Storing data in the phone book
●
Deleting
Dialing by inputting a number
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
412
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Dialing by inputting a name
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk switch while the desired name is being read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
3
Speed dialing
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press the off-hook switch.
When receiving a phone call
■
Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
■
Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
413
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch
*1
.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”
*2
.
*1
: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2
: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone.
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory:
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back”
(when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number by using .
414
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” by using a voice command or .
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .
■
Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories.
■
When talking on the phone
●
Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
●
Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.
3
415
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered cellular phones:
■
Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a voice command or :
●
Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Pair Phone”
●
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Select Phone”
●
Changing a registered name
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Change Name”
●
Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “List Phones”
●
Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Delete Phone”
●
Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Set Passkey”
●
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
1. “Setup”
2. “Phone Setup”
3. “Hands-free power”
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or procedure for registering a cellular phone. (
, and do the
416
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
Select the cellular phone to be used by using .
3
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and
.
select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk switch.
c. Select the desired phone name by using .
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” by using
, and say a new name.
417
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
Listing the registered cellular phones
.
Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or causes the list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”
Deleting a cellular phone
Select “Delete Phone” by using a voice command or .
Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the talk switch.
418
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
■
Turning off the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or
.
3
Select “Turn off” by using a voice command or .
■
Turning on the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or
.
Select “Turn on” by using a voice command or .
■
The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
419
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Security and system setup
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■
Security setting items and operation procedure
●
Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup”
2. “Security”
3. “Set PIN”
●
Locking the phone book
1. “Setup”
2. “Security”
3. “Phonebook Lock”
●
Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup”
2. “Security”
3. “Phonebook Unlock”
■
System setup items and operation procedure
●
Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Guidance Volume”
●
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Device Name”
●
Initialization
1. “Setup”
2. “System Setup”
3. “Initialize”
can only be used for system setup operation.
Setting or changing the PIN
■
Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or
Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .
.
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
420
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .
Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or
.
Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook lock” or “Phonebook unlock” by using a voice command or .
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN by using .
3
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Volume” by using
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
.
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
421
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
Select “Device Name” using .
Turn name.
to display the Bluetooth
Select “Go Back” using
®
device address and
to return to “System Setup”.
Initialization
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using
Select “Confirm” by using .
.
■
Initialization
●
The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
●
Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state.
■
When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
●
Dialing by inputting a name
●
Speed dialing
●
Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
●
Using the phone book
422
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
●
Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook”
2. “Add Entry”
●
Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook”
2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
●
Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook”
2. “Change Name”
●
Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook”
2. “Delete Entry”
●
Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook”
2. “Delete Speed Dial”
●
Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook”
2. “List Names”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●
Inputting a phone number by using a voice command
●
Transferring data from the cellular phone
●
Inputting a phone number by using
●
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
3
423
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■
Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data by using .
Inputting a phone number by using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .
STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using
once again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
, and press
424
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or .
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.
3 b. Select the desired data by using .
Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” by using desired name.
, and say the
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of
“Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
425
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting speed dials
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command or .
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired data by using .
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
426
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or
Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods.
a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select “Con-
.
firm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
3 c. Select the desired name by using .
Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.
Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Deleting registered data
Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
: a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired phone number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the talk switch.
427
3-5. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Deleting speed dials
Select “Delete Speed Dial” by using a voice command or
.
Press the preset button for which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
.
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” by using a voice command causes a list of the registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following functions will be available.
• Dialing: “Dial”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
• Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
■
Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
428
3-6. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Toyota is equipped with an illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Due to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the engine switch position.
3
Outer foot lights (if equipped)
Interior light (
Personal/interior lights (
Engine switch light
Foot well lighting
Door courtesy lights
Ashtray lighting
429
3-6. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior light main switch
■
To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the personal/interior light main switch is in door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■
Customization
●
That can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles without multi-information display)
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features
●
It is possible to change the settings (vehicles with multi-information display) (Feature customization
Personal/interior light main switch
ON
The personal/interior lights cannot be individually turned off.
DOOR position
The personal/interior lights come on when a door is opened. They turn off when the doors are closed.
OFF
The personal/interior lights and interior light can be individually turned on or off.
430
Personal/interior lights
■
Front
Type A
On/off
3-6. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior lights
3
Type B
On/off
■
Center
Type A
On/off
431
3-6. Using the interior lights
Type B
Personal/interior lights and interior light
On/off
■
Rear
On/off
Interior light
DOOR position
The interior light comes on when a back door is opened. It turns off when the door is closed.
OFF
ON
432
3-7. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Overhead console
Glove boxes
Auxiliary boxes
Bottle holders
Cup holders
Rear console box (if equipped)
Cup holder (if equipped)
Front console box
• Card holder
• Map holder
• Pen holder
• Tissue pocket
Map holder
Coin holder (if equipped)
433
3
3-7. Using the storage features
Glove boxes
CAUTION
■
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●
Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.
●
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.
Glove boxes
Upper glove box
Push the button.
Lower glove box
Unlock with the master key
Lock with the master key
434
3-7. Using the storage features
Glove boxes and coin holder
Pull the lever up.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Coin holder (if equipped)
Open the lid.
3
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
435
3-7. Using the storage features
Front console box
Front console box
Pull the knob up and lift the lid.
■
When using the front console box lid as an armrest
Pull the knob up and slide the lid forward.
If necessary, the console box lid can slide forward. Pull the lid forward by grasping the front of the lid.
When the lid is forward, it cannot be lifted.
436
3-7. Using the storage features
Front console box
■
Tray in the front console box
The tray slides forward or backward. The tray can be removed.
The box can be removed. Hanging file folders can be hung on the rails when the box is removed.
3
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
437
3-7. Using the storage features
Card holder
Card holder
Pull the knob up and lift the lid.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
438
Map holder
Center console
3-7. Using the storage features
Map holder
Push the tab down to release the lock. Remove the lid.
Stow the lid.
3
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
439
3-7. Using the storage features
Front console box
Map holder
Pull the knob up and lift the lid.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
440
Pen holder
3-7. Using the storage features
Pen holder
Pull the knob up and lift the lid.
3
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
441
3-7. Using the storage features
Tissue pocket
Tissue pocket
Pull the knob up and lift the lid.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
442
3-7. Using the storage features
Rear console box
Rear console box (if equipped)
Upper box
Push the knob and lift the lid.
Lower box
Pull the knob up and lift the upper box.
3
443
3-7. Using the storage features
Rear console box
■
The separator can be used at either of two positions shown in the illustration
Change the separator position.
■
The separator can be stowed
Stow the separator to the lid.
■
Back side tray
Open the upper box to use the back side tray.
444
■
The inside tray can be removed
Pull the tray up.
3-7. Using the storage features
Rear console box
■
When closing the rear console box lid
Close the rear console box by lifting the grip on the inside of the upper box.
3
445
3-7. Using the storage features
Rear console box and overhead console
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■
When opening/closing the lower box
Be careful not to get your hands or feet caught between the lower box and the upper box.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
■
When opening the lower box
Make sure that the upper box is locked. Items stored inside may fall out and cause injury.
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.
Type A
Push the knob forward to open the console.
446
Type B
3-7. Using the storage features
Overhead console
Push the knob forward to open the console.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items stored in it may fall out and cause injury.
3
447
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
Front console box
Pull the lid down.
Rear
Cup holders
448
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Rear console box (if equipped)
Attach the separator when using either console box as a cup holder.
Both cup holders cannot be used at the same time.
3
■
Removing the cup holder (front)
Push the tab down to release the lock.
Remove the lid.
Stow the lid.
449
3-7. Using the storage features
Pull the cup holder up.
Cup holders
■
Removing the separator (rear console box)
Inside
Pull the separator up.
Outside
Pull the separator up.
450
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders
■
The position of the separator can be changed (rear console box)
Inside
Change the separator position.
Outside
Change the separator position.
3
■
The separator can be adjusted (rear console box)
Adjust the separator.
451
3-7. Using the storage features
Cup holders and bottle holders
CAUTION
■
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■
When not in use
Front console box and rear console box (inside) cup holder: Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■
Before sliding the center second seat to the most forward position
(vehicles with bench type second seat)
Ensure that the cup holder on the front console box is closed.
Bottle holders
Front
452
3-7. Using the storage features
Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes
Rear
NOTICE
■
Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
3
Auxiliary boxes
Front
Press the knob then pull the lid down.
453
3-7. Using the storage features
Rear
Pull the lid up.
Auxiliary boxes
Rear console box (if equipped)
Pull the lever up to release the lock. Pull the handle.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
454
3-8. Other interior features
Sun visors
■
Main visor
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position then slide backwards.
3
■
Sub visor (if equipped)
Flip down.
455
3-8. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Vehicles without vanity light
Open the cover.
Vehicles with vanity light
Open the cover.
The light turns on when the cover is opened.
Adjust the brightness of the light.
456
3-8. Other interior features
Clock
Adjusts the hours.
Adjusts the minutes.
■
For quicker adjustment of the clock
Hold down the M or H button continuously. This allows faster advancement of the minutes and hours.
■
The clock is displayed when
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
■
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
3
457
3-8. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F
(-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
Switches the outside air temperature display between °C (Celsius) and
°F (Fahrenheit). (if equipped)
Vehicles without multi-information display:
Push the SETUP button until the desired unit of measurement is displayed.
Vehicles with multi-information display:
With the customized unitchange operation for the multiinformation display, the unit of measurement can be changed.
(
458
3-8. Other interior features
■
When – –°C or – –°F is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
■
The outside air temperature is displayed when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The display will automatically be set to the initial mode.
■
Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
●
When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
●
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/ exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
3
459
3-8. Other interior features
Portable ashtray
The ashtray can be installed in a cup holder.
■
The ashtray can be removed
Pull the ashtray up.
CAUTION
■
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■
To prevent fire
●
Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, and then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●
Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
460
3-8. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use.
■
The cigarette lighter can be used when
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
CAUTION
■
To avoid burns or fires
●
Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●
Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●
Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
3
461
3-8. Other interior features
Conversation mirror
Push the lid.
The mirror can be adjusted by pushing the mirror edge.
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
462
3-8. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
115V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
Instrument panel (12 V)
3
463
3-8. Other interior features
Inside the front console box (12 V)
Pull the knob up to release the lock. Lift the lid.
Back of the front console box (12 V)
*1
*1
: Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system
464
3-8. Other interior features
Back of the front console box (115V AC)
*2
Power outlet socket
Luggage compartment (12 V)
3
*2
: Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system
■
The power outlet can be used when
12V
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
115V AC
The engine switch is in the ON position.
465
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Using a power outlet
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.
●
Use of the power outlet when it is wet with drinking water or snow may result in electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be thoroughly dried before use.
●
Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.
●
Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid.
●
When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices written on their labels and in the manufacturers’ instruction manuals.
●
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter, in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary repairs.
■
To prevent injuries and accidents, securely fix all electric appliances before use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following:
●
Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.
●
Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating while driving.
●
Emit steam, while the windows of the cabin are closed.
■
To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not perform any of the following.
●
Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.
●
Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud.
●
Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or feet.
●
Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet.
●
Using malfunctioning electric appliances.
●
Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.
466
3-8. Other interior features
NOTICE
■
To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug
●
Close the power outlet lid when not in use.
●
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
●
Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.
●
After inserting a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.
■
To prevent the fuse from being blown
12V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115V AC
Do not use a 115V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.
■
Appliances that may not operate properly (115V AC)
The following 115V AC appliances may not operate even if their power consumption is under 100 W.
●
Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●
Measuring devices that process precise data
●
Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
■
To prevent the battery from being discharged
Turn off all the vehicle’s electronic equipment and accessories, such as the headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in excess of 100W are used continuously for long periods of time.
■
To prevent any damage caused by heat
●
Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat such as toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and deck.
●
Do not use any electrical appliances, which are easily affected by vibration or heat, inside the vehicle.
Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances.
3
467
3-8. Other interior features
NOTICE
■
If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving
Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from falling or getting caught any of the power train components.
■
If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is connected
Replace the outlet.
Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements.
■
If the power outlet gets dirty
Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently.
Do not use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction.
468
3-8. Other interior features
Seat heaters
■
Front seat
On
The indicator comes on.
Adjusts the seat temperature.
The further you turn the dial upward, the warmer the seat becomes.
3
: If equipped
469
3-8. Other interior features
■
Rear seat (vehicles with rear console box)
Press the LO or HI switch to warm the seats to a low or high temperature respectively.
High temperature
The indicator (yellow) comes on.
Low temperature
The indicator (green) comes on.
■
The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
When not in use
Front seat: Turn the dial fully downward. The indicator turns off.
Rear seat (vehicles with rear console box): Push lightly on the opposite side.
The indicator turns off.
470
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Burns
●
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
3
NOTICE
■
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
471
3-8. Other interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators
Blows air from the seats
The indicator comes on. The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.
Heats the seats
The indicator comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.
■
The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■
When not in use
Set the dial to 0. The indicator turns off.
: If equipped
472
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Burns
●
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
3
NOTICE
■
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
473
3-8. Other interior features
Armrests
Separated seat
Bench seat
Adjusting to the desired angle:
Lower the armrest from the highest position to the lowest position.
Raise the armrest to the desired angle.
Unlock the armrest:
Lift the armrest to raise it to the highest position.
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the armrest
●
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
●
Do not sit on the armrest.
474
: If equipped
3-8. Other interior features
Rear side sunshades
Rear door window
Pull the tab up.
Hook the sunshade onto the anchors.
To lower the sunshade, pull the tab slightly to unhook the shade, and lower it slowly.
3
: If equipped
475
3-8. Other interior features
Rear quarter window
Pull the tab up.
Hook the sunshade onto the anchors.
To lower the sunshade, pull the tab slightly to unhook the shade, and lower it slowly.
NOTICE
■
To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
●
Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the sunshade.
●
Do not place anything on the sunshade.
476
3-8. Other interior features
Seatback table
Front passenger’s seatback can be used as a temporary table only when the vehicle is stopped.
Fold down the front passenger’s seat to use the seatback table. (
CAUTION
■
Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury.
●
Do not set up the seatback table.
●
Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback table.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the seatback table
Do not put heavy loads on the table.
3
: If equipped
477
3-8. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
For details, refer to the floor mat retention clip installation instructions supplied with the clips.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■
When installing the driver’s floor mat
●
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●
Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●
Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●
Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
478
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
Before driving
●
Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the right place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
●
With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.
3
479
3-8. Other interior features
Luggage compartment features
■
Tie-down hooks
Tie-down hooks are provided for securing loose items.
480
■
Cargo net hooks
3-8. Other interior features
To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net hooks.
The cargo net itself is not included as original equipment.
3
481
3-8. Other interior features
■
Shopping bag hooks
To hang shopping bags, use the shopping bag hooks.
482
■
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
3-8. Other interior features
Pull the lever upwards to lift the deck board.
3
Type B (if equipped)
Open the cover.
483
3-8. Other interior features
CAUTION
■
When the tie-down hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the tie-down hooks to their retracted positions when they are not in use.
■
Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
484
3-8. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink
®
.
Programming the HomeLink
®
(for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink
®
compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
3
■
Programming the HomeLink
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink
® control buttons.
Keep the indicator on the
HomeLink
®
in view while programming.
: If equipped
485
3-8. Other interior features
Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink
®
and the button on the transmitter.
When the indicator on the
HomeLink
®
changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink
®
indicator comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink
® button is already programmed. Use the other buttons or follow the
“Reprogramming a HomeLink
® button” instructions. (
Test the operation of the
HomeLink
®
by pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink
®
button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator (on the
HomeLink
®
) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling
Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
486
3-8. Other interior features
■
Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink
®
” before proceeding with the steps listed below.
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
®
button for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink
®
transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■
Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink
®
.
Keep the indicator on the HomeLink
®
in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink
®
button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator on the HomeLink
®
compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
487
3
3-8. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink
®
by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.
■
Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink
®
buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions.
Operating the HomeLink
®
Press the appropriate HomeLink
®
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator on the HomeLink
®
transceiver should turn on.
The HomeLink
®
continues to send a signal for a maximum of 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink
®
button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink
® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink
®
indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink
®
button and then follow the “Programming the HomeLink
®
(for U.S.A. owners)” instructions. (
488
3-8. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink
®
memory (all three programs)
Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
®
memory.
■
Before programming
●
Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●
The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink
®
.
■
Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
• Vehicles with rear view monitor system
FCC ID: NZLGHSHL4
• Vehicles without rear view monitor system
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
489
3
3-8. Other interior features
■
When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
■
When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door may operate, so ensure that people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■
Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink
®
Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
490
3-8. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.
■
Operation
Type A
To turn the compass on or off, press the switch.
Type B
To turn the compass on or off, press the switch.
3
: If equipped
491
3-8. Other interior features
■
Displays and directions
Display
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
Calibrating the compass
Direction
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or accurate calibration, refer to the following.
492
3-8. Other interior features
■
Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press the switch until a number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.
Type A
3
Type B
Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
493
3-8. Other interior features
■
Circling calibration
When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.
■
Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●
The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●
The battery has been disconnected.
●
A door is open.
CAUTION
■
While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■
When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
494
3-8. Other interior features
NOTICE
■
To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■
To ensure normal operation of the compass
●
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
3
495
3-8. Other interior features
496
Maintenance and care
4
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior......... 498
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.......... 500
Maintenance requirements .................. 503
General maintenance....... 505
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs........................ 508
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions .................... 509
Hood ................................ 513
Engine compartment........ 514
Tires ................................. 529
Tire inflation pressure ...... 536
Wheels ............................. 540
Air conditioning filter......... 542
Wireless remote control battery ............................ 545
Checking and replacing fuses .............................. 547
Light bulbs........................ 558
497
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
●
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
●
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
●
Wipe away any water.
●
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■
Automatic car washes
●
Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■
Aluminum wheels
●
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●
Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
498
4-1. Maintenance and care
■
Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■
Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)
●
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●
To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■
Cleaning the exterior lights
●
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
4
499
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:
■
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■
Cleaning the leather areas
●
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●
Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
●
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
■
Synthetic leather areas
●
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.
●
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
500
4-1. Maintenance and care
■
Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■
Water in the vehicle
●
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
4
501
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■
Cleaning detergents
●
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
●
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.
●
Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●
Do not place items made of vinyl or plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.
■
Cleaning the inside of the back window and the rear quarter windows
●
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the back window and the rear quarter windows, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antennas. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
●
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antennas.
502
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
■
General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■
Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
4
■
Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
Flex-fuel vehicles: Flex-fuel vehicles use special parts made exclusively for flex-fuel vehicles. When servicing or repairing your vehicles, use genuine
Toyota parts made exclusively for your flex-fuel vehicle.
503
4-2. Maintenance
■
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●
Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●
Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■
Warning in handling of battery
●
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●
Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (
504
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your
Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Battery
Brake fluid
Engine coolant
Engine oil
Exhaust system
Power steering fluid
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Washer fluid
Check points
Maintenance-free.
(
At the correct level? (
At the correct level?
(
At the correct level?
(
No fumes or strange sounds?
At the correct level?
(
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(
At the correct level?
(
4
505
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Accelerator pedal
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Brake pedal
Brakes
Head restraints
Indicators/buzzers
Lights
Parking brake
Seat belts
Seats
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?
• Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
• Function properly?
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?
• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
506
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Doors
Engine hood
Fluid leaks
Items
Tire
Check points
• Operate smoothly?
• The lock system works properly?
• Is there any leakage after parking?
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
4
507
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.
■
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●
When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
●
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■
When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
508
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.
Fuses
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine oil level
(
(
Engine coolant level (
(
Parts and tools
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding oil)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
4
509
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
Items
(
Power steering fluid level
(
Parts and tools
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON
®
II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)
Radiator and condenser
(
Tire inflation pressure (
Washer fluid
(
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
• Water
• Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding washer fluid)
510
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury observe the following precautions.
■
When working on the engine compartment
●
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
●
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
●
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
●
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■
When working near the cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch on, the cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
■
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.
4
511
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■
If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
■
If the brake fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the brake fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
512
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the hood catch lever and lift the hood.
CAUTION
■
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
4
513
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
514
Washer fluid tank (
Engine oil level dipstick
(
Engine coolant reservoir
(
Engine oil filler cap
(
Brake fluid reservoir
(
Fuse box
Battery
(
(
Radiator
Condenser
(
(
Power steering fluid reservoir
(
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4
515
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
Items Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap, turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly.
Checking the dipstick.
Reinstall the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
516
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Engine oil consumption
●
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●
A new engine consumes more oil.
●
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
■
After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown.
While pressing the trip meter reset button (
engine switch on.
Without multi-information display
Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays
000000.
With multi-information display
Continue to press and hold the button until “MAINT REQD RESET
MODE COMPLETE” appears on the multi-information display.
4
517
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Used engine oil
●
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
●
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■
When replacing the engine oil
●
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●
Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
●
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
518
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
FULL
LOW
If the level is on or below the
LOW line, add coolant up to the
FULL line.
■
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
■
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31
F [-35
C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44
F [-42
C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
4
519
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■
When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
520
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause burns.
Brake fluid
■
Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
4
■
Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
■
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
521
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
■
If you spill fluid
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
522
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Power steering fluid
■
Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F[10°C - 30°C])
■
Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
4
Fluid type
Items
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid)
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.
Check the fluid level.
523
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■
When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■
After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.
Battery
■
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
524
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
●
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
CAUTION
■
Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
●
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●
Keep children away from the battery.
■
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■
How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5A or less).
The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
4
525
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
●
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
526
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
Add washer fluid in the following situations.
●
Any washer does not work.
●
The low washer fluid warning light comes on.
●
The warning message appears on the multi-information display.
(if equipped)
Open the lid.
Add washer fluid.
4
527
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
528
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
■
Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.
■
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
■
The tire pressure warning system
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (
4
529
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:
●
When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
●
When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch off.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (
Ma ke sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
530
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.
Wait for several minutes with the engine switch on, and then turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.
4
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
■
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should by replaced if:
●
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
●
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
531
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■
Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (
■
Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
532
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (
■
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■
If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■
When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in several minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●
When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times.
●
After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and then stays on after driving for about
20 minutes.
■
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
4
533
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: GQ4-32T
FCC ID: GQ4-37R
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●
Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●
Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●
Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
●
Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
●
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
534
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
NOTICE
■
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
●
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’ s wheels and body.
■
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
4
535
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (
536
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
4
537
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●
Reduced fuel efficiency
●
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●
Reduced safety
●
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
●
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
538
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●
Excessive wear
●
Uneven wear
●
Poor handling
●
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●
Poor sealing of the tire bead
●
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
4
539
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
●
Wheels of different sizes or types
●
Used wheels
●
Bent wheels that have been straightened
■
Wheel precautions
●
Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
●
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 100 miles (160 km).
●
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
●
Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
540
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (except for spare tire) that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (
CAUTION
■
When replacing wheels
●
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●
Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
4
541
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■
Removal method
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the glove box.
Remove the internal tray.
Remove the inside cover by sliding up while pulling toward you.
542
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the filter cover.
■
Cleaning method
Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at
72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm
2 or bar).
If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your
Toyota dealer.
543
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.
The
“
UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.
■
Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■
To prevent damage to the system
●
When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
●
When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
544
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wireless remote control battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■
You will need the following items:
Lithium battery CR2032
■
Replacing the battery
Remove the cover using a coin protected with tape etc.
Remove the discharged transmitter battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
4
545
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
If the wireless remote control battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●
The wireless remote control will not function properly.
●
The operational range is reduced.
■
Use a CR2032 lithium battery
●
Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
●
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
●
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■
Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●
Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
546
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the engine switch off.
The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Under the instrument panel
Remove the lid.
4
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (
P. 550) for details about which fuse to check.
547
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
548
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
4
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
549
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■
Engine compartment
Fuse
1 A/F
2 HORN
3 EFI NO.1
4 IG2 MAIN
5 L2 RR2 SEAT
6 L1 RR2 SEAT
7 CDS FAN
8 DEICER
9 TOW TAIL
10 R2 RR2 SEAT
550
11 R1 RR2 SEAT
12 POWER NO.4
30 A
30 A
30 A
25 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
25 A
Ampere
15 A
10 A
25 A
Circuit
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Horn
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
INJ, MET, IGN fuses
Power third seat
Power third seat
Electric cooling fans
Windshield wiper de-icer
Trailer lights (tail lights)
Power third seat
Power third seat
Power windows
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
13
14
Fuse
FOG
15 TOW BRK
16 IMB
17 AM2
18 TOWING
19 ALT-S
20 TURN-HAZ
21 F/PMP
22 ETCS
23 MET-B
24 AMP
25 RAD NO.1
26
STOP
ECU-B1
Ampere
15 A
15 A
30 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
5 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
5 A
30 A
15 A
7.5 A
Front fog lights
Circuit
Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, vehicle stability control system, anti-lock brake system, shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, towing converter
Trailer brake controller
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Starting system
Towing converter
Charging system
Turn signal lights, emergency flashers, towing converter
No circuit
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, electric throttle control system
Gauges and meters
Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system
Audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system
Multiplex communication system,
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic, power back door
551
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
552
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
HEAD LH
HEAD LL
IGN
Fuse
DOME
INJ
MET
HEAD RH
HEAD RL
35 EFI NO.2
36 DEF I/UP
37 AIR SUS NO.2
38 SPARE
39 SPARE
40 SPARE
41 AIR SUS
5 A
7.5 A
5 A
15 A
30 A
50 A
Ampere
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
Circuit
Interior lights, personal lights, vanity lights, engine switch light, foot light, door courtesy lights, accessory meter, power back door, power third seat
Left-hand headlight
(high beam)
Left-hand headlight
(low beam)
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, ignition system
Gauges and meters
SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system
Right-hand headlight
(high beam)
Right-hand headlight
(low beam)
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, leak detection pump
No circuit
Electronically modulated air suspension system
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Electronically modulated air suspension system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
42 PBD
43 RR HTR
44 H-LP CLN
45 DEFOG
46 SUB BATT
47
48
49 ST
50 HTR
51
52
53
54
55
ALT
Fuse
ABS1
ABS2
LH-J/B
A/PUMP NO.1
A/PUMP NO.2
MAIN
Ampere
30 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
50 A
40 A
30 A
50 A
150 A
180 A
140 A
50 A
50 A
40 A
*
*
Circuit
Power back door
Air conditioning system
Headlight cleaner
Rear window defogger
Trailer towing
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system
Starting system
Air conditioning system
AM1, TAIL, PANEL, ACC, CIG, LH-
IG, 4WD, ECU-IG NO.1, BK/UP LP,
SEAT-HTR, A/C IG, ECU-IG NO.2,
WSH, WIPER, OBD, A/C, TI&TE,
FR P/SEAT RH, MIR, DR/LCK, FR
P/SEAT LH, CARGO LP, PWR
OUTLET, POWER NO.1 fuses
LH-J/B, HTR, SUB BATT, TOW
BRK, STOP, FOG, TOW TAIL,
DEICER fuses
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
HEAD LL, HEAD RL,
HEAD LH, HEAD RH fuses
*
: Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original.
4
553
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Under the instrument panel
554
Fuse
1 INVERTER
2 FR P/SEAT LH
3 DR/LCK
4 POWER No.5
5 OBD
6 PWR OUTLET
7 AM1
8 A/C
9 MIR
10 POWER No.3
11 FR P/SEAT RH
12 TI&TE
13 S/ROOF
14
RR SEAT-HTR
RH
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
30 A
15 A
25 A
Ampere
15 A
30 A
25 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
Circuit
Power outlet (115 V)
Power front driver’s seat
Multiplex communication system
Power back door
On-board diagnosis system
Power outlets
Shift lock system, starting system, seat heaters
Air conditioning system
Outside rear view mirror control, outside rear view mirror heaters
Power windows
Power front passenger seat
Power tilt and power telescopic
Electric moon roof
Seat heaters
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
15
16
17
Fuse
ECU-IG No.1
AIR SUS IG
LH-IG
18 4WD
19
RR SEAT-HTR
LH
20 WSH
21 WIPER
22 ECU-IG No.2
23 TAIL
24 A/C IG
25 SEAT-HTR
20 A
10 A
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
Ampere
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
Circuit
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, multiplex communication system, intuitive parking assist system, power front driver’s seat, power tilt and power telescopic, shift lock, tire pressure warning system, accessory meter, trailer towing, power outlet, electric moon roof, power back door, head light cleaner
Electronically modulated air suspension system
Back-up lights, charging system, gauge and meters, turn signal lights, air conditioning system, seat heaters, rear window defogger
Four-wheel drive control system
Seat heaters
Window washer
Wiper and washer
Multiplex communication system
Tail lights, trailer lights (tail lights), parking lights
Air conditioning system
Seat heater or Heated and ventilated seats
4
555
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
26
27
Fuse
PANEL
ACC
28 BK/UP LP
29 CIG
30 POWER No.1
Ampere
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
30 A
Circuit
Instrument panel lights, glove box light, ashtray, accessory meter, audio system, rear view monitor, navigation system, rear seat entertainment system, gauges and meters, air conditioning system, seat heater or heated and ventilated switches
Accessory meter, audio system, rear seat entertainment system, rear view monitor, navigation system, back-up lights, trailer lights
(back-up lights), multiplex communication system, power outlet, outside rear view mirror
Back-up light, gauges and meters
Cigarette lighter
Power windows, power back window
■
After a fuse is replaced
●
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (
●
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
556
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●
Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●
Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
4
557
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■
Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (
■
Front bulb locations
Front turn signal/ parking lights and daytime running lights (if equipped)
Headlight low beam
Headlight high beam
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
Front side marker lights
558
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Rear bulb locations
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights
Tail lights
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs
■
Headlight high beam
License plate lights
Back-up lights
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
4
559
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
■
Headlight low beam
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
560
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Front turn signal/parking lights and daytime running lights
(if equipped)
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
4
561
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Front side marker lights
Remove the fender liner clip.
Partly remove the fender liner and turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
562
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
■
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the bolts and partly remove the fender liner.
Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
4
Turn the bulb counterclockwise.
563
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, rear turn signal lights
Right side
Open the back door and remove the cover.
To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver or equivalent and cover as shown in the illustrations.
Left side (vehicles without speaker in the luggage)
Open the back door and remove the covers.
To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver or equivalent and cover as shown in the illustrations.
564
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Left side (vehicles with speaker in the luggage)
Open the back door and remove the cover.
To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver or equivalent and cover as shown in the illustrations.
Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.
Stop/tail and rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
4
Remove the light bulb.
Stop/tail and rear side marker light
Rear turn signal light
565
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tail lights, back-up lights
Remove the covers. (vehicles with power back door only)
To protect the cover, place a rag between the flathead screwdriver or equivalent and cover as shown in the illustrations.
Remove the nuts.
Remove the rear combination light assembly in the order shown in the illustration.
566
■
License plate lights
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Tail light
Back-up light
Remove the light bulb.
Tail light
Back-up light
Remove the screws and light unit.
4
567
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
■
Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.
• High mounted stoplight
• Outer foot light (if equipped)
• Side turn signal light (if equipped)
■
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.
●
Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●
Water has built up inside the headlight.
■
LED high mounted stoplight and side turn signal light
The high mounted stoplight and side turn signal light consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■
Installing the fender liner clips
Insert the clip.
568
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■
Replacing light bulbs
●
Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
4
569
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
570
When trouble arises
5
Emergency flashers ......... 572
If your vehicle needs to be towed ........................ 573
If you think something is wrong ............................. 579
Fuel pump shut off system ........................... 580
Event data recorder ......... 581
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................ 583
If you have a flat tire......... 597
If the engine will not start ................................ 608
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............ 610
If you lose your keys ........ 611
If the vehicle battery is discharged ..................... 612
If your vehicle overheats ....................... 615
If the vehicle becomes stuck .............................. 618
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ................ 619
571
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
572
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.
●
The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Type A
Towing eyelet
5
573
5-1. Essential information
Type B
Towing eyelet
■
Emergency towing procedure
The engine switch must be in the ACC (engine off) or the ON
(engine running) position.
4WD models: Put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD.
Put the shift lever in N.
Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
■
Caution while towing
●
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always use caution for the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
574
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
■
Emergency towing eyelet precautions
●
Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.
●
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.
●
Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.
●
To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
Towing with a sling-type truck
5
NOTICE
■
To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
575
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
NOTICE
■
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the rear
2WD models
Turn the engine switch to the
ACC position.
576
5-1. Essential information
4WD models
When not using a towing dolly, turn the engine switch to the
ACC position, shift the shift lever to N and put the front wheel drive control switch in 2WD.
NOTICE
■
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (4WD models)
Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.
■
To prevent damaging the vehicle
●
Do not tow the vehicle with the key removed or in the LOCK position.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.
●
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
5
577
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
Front
If your Toyota is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.
Vehicles without electronically modulated air suspension
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45
.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45
.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
578
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■
Visible symptoms
●
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher or lower than normal
●
Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal
●
Engine oil pressure gauge continually points higher or lower than normal
●
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge needle continually points higher or lower than normal (if equipped)
■
Audible symptoms
●
Changes in exhaust sound
●
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●
Strange noises related to the suspension system
●
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■
Operational symptoms
●
Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●
Appreciable loss of power
●
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
5
579
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
580
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
●
Engine speed
●
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●
Vehicle speed
●
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●
Position of the transmission shift lever
●
Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●
Driver’s seat position
●
SRS airbag deployment data
●
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●
Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
5
581
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
●
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
●
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●
Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
●
Ordered by a court of law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
●
Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
●
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
●
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes
582
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])
5
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
583
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system;
• The electronic automatic transmission control system; or
• The emission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
(Canada)
(Flashing) and
VSC OFF and slip indicators
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC;
• The TRAC; or
• The AUTO LSD system.
584
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light Warning light/Details
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
• When the light comes on: Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
• When the light flashes: Indicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning system.
Power steering warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the variable flow control power steering system.
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)
*1
Indicates that a door or back door is not fully closed.
Check that all doors are closed.
5
(On the instrument cluster)
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*2
Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
585
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(On the center panel)
Warning light/Details
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*3
Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
• When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
• When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
Correction procedure
Fasten the seat belt.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure.
Have the system checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Low fuel level warning light
Low level of fuel.
Refuel the vehicle.
*4
*4
(U.S.A.)
Low washer fluid warning light
Low level of washer fluid.
Fill the tank.
Engine oil replacement reminder light
• Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds: Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.
• Comes on and remains:
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.
Check and change the engine oil.
586
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
*5
Warning light/Details
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
Correction procedure
*1
: Open door warning buzzer:
The buzzer sounds to indicate that any door is opened (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])
*2
: Driver’s seat belt reminder:
The driver’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*3
: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder:
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for
10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/ h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*4
: Vehicles without multi-information display
*5
: Vehicles with multi-information display
5
■
Four-wheel drive system warning buzzer
The buzzer indicated that the transfer mode is not selected correctly.
■
Key reminder buzzer
The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).
587
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
Open moon roof reminder buzzer
The buzzer indicate that the moon roof is still opened (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).
■
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●
Is your vehicle low on gas?
If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.
●
Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light to flash and buzzer to sound.
■
When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after several minutes).
■
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the temporary spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after several minutes.
588
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
●
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
●
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
●
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.
●
If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●
If tire chains are used.
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■
After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (
■
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features
5
589
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
●
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
●
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■
Maintenance of the tire
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
590
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
5
NOTICE
■
Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
591
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with multi-information display)
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Toyota dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message Details
(Flashing)
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds and the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on.
592
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.
Warning message Details
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Open door warning light also comes on.
Indicates that the back door is not fully closed.
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the back door is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Correction procedure
Make sure that all of the doors are closed.
Closed the back door.
5
593
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing)
Details
Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph (5 km/h).
A buzzer also sounds intermittently.
Correction procedure
Release the parking brake.
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Add washer fluid.
(U.S.A. only)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset).
Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).
Check and change the engine oil.
594
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details
Indicates that the fuel level is low.
A buzzer also sounds and the low fuel level warning light comes on.
Correction procedure
Fill up the tank as soon as possible.
(if equipped)
Indicates that the laser radar sensor is dirty or covered with ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
(if equipped)
Indicates that the dynamic laser cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
A buzzer also sounds.
If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode).
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
5
(Flashing)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(Flashing)
Indicates that the dynamic laser cruise control system is malfunction.
A buzzer also sounds.
Press the ON-OFF button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
595
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (
■
Warning light display in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehicle distance closes.
●
When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
●
When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
●
Immediately after cruise control speed is set
●
At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
596
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■
Before jacking up the vehicle
●
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●
Press the height control mode select switch to set the height control system to manual mode (if equipped)
●
Set the parking brake.
●
Shift the shift lever to P.
●
Stop the engine.
●
Turn on the emergency flashers.
■
Location of the spare tire
5
■
Location of the jack and tools
597
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack and tool bag
Pull the deck board up.
Remove the cover and loosen the strap.
Remove the tools.
Tighten
Loosen
598
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the cover.
Assemble the jack handle extension as shown.
Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise.
After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.
5
599
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Front
Rear
Flat tire
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Wheel chock positions
Behind the rear righthand side tire
Behind the rear lefthand side tire
In front of the front right-hand side tire
In front of the front left-hand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
600
Front
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.
Front
Rear
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
5
601
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
Tapered portion
Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel.
Disc wheel
Lower the vehicle.
602
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
*
*
: When used on aluminum wheel, apply 97 ft·lbf (131
N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)
Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
Remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side.
Lay down the tire with the outer side facing up, and install the holding bracket.
Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.
Keep winding until three clicks are heard.
Stow the tools and jack securely.
■
After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (
■
When using the temporary spare tire
As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
5
603
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Using the jack
Improper use of the jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
●
Do not use the jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
●
Only use the jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
●
Always check that the jack is securely set to the jack point.
●
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
●
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
●
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
■
Using the jack handle
Insert the square head securely until you hear a click to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
■
Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●
Retighten the wheel nuts within 100 miles (160 km) of driving. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.
●
Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the vehicle.
●
Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
604
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease form the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Steel wheel: 154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheel: 97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
●
Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
■
When using the temporary spare tire
●
Remember that your temporary spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another vehicle.
●
Do not use two temporary spare tires simultaneously.
●
Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●
Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■
Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
5
605
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■
When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
●
ABS & Brake assist
●
VSC
●
TRAC
●
A-TRAC
●
AUTO LSD
●
Cruise control
●
Navigation system
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:
●
4WD system
606
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.
■
When replacing the tires
●
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●
Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.
■
To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
5
607
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting procedure (
P. 157) or releasing the steering lock (
the following points.
■
The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle. (
Flex-fuel vehicles: The type of fuel may be different. When refueling, add the same type of fuel, if available.
After adding a different type of fuel, the engine may run roughly and driving performance may be reduced for a while when the engine is first started. In this case, wait until the engine runs normally.
●
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures.
●
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(
■
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●
The battery may be discharged. (
●
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
608
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●
The battery may be discharged. (
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
5
609
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
610
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using one of the master keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate. (
■
If you lose all your master keys.
You cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.
5
611
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below.
Connect the jumper cables.
612
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the vehicle’s engine.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■
Avoiding a discharged battery
●
Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
●
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■
When the battery is removed or discharged
Flex-fuel vehicles: The information recorded in the computer will be cleared, which may cause the engine to run roughly and reduce driving performance for a while when the engine is first started. In this case, wait until the engine runs normally.
If the vehicle is running on E85, the engine may stall. In this case, restart the engine, repeatedly if necessary.
5
613
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
●
Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.
●
Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.
■
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
●
Do not lean over the battery.
●
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
●
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
●
Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■
When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
614
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Toyota dealer.
5
615
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The engine has cooled down sufficiently.
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates C.
Check the engine coolant level.
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses and under the vehicle.
Note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.
Add engine coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
616
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.
●
Steam is coming from under the hood.
●
“ENGINE COOLANT HOT” is shown on the multi-information display
(vehicles with multi-information display).
CAUTION
■
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●
If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.
●
Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running.
●
Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.
5
NOTICE
■
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
617
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Turn off the VSC. (
Shift the shift lever to D or R and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
CAUTION
■
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■
When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●
Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●
If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
618
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the ACC position.
5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
619
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■
If the engine has to be turned off while driving
●
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
●
Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
620
Vehicle specifications
6
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ......... 622
Fuel information ............... 635
Tire information ................ 639
Customizable features ..... 650
Items to initialize .............. 654
621
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height*
Wheelbase
Front tread
Rear tread
*
: Unladen vehicle
205.1 in. (5210 mm)
79.9 in. (2030 mm)
Without roof rails
74.6 in. (1895 mm)
With roof rails
77.0 in. (1955 mm)
122.0 in. (3100 mm)
67.9 in. (1725 mm)
69.1 in. (1755 mm)
622
6-1. Specifications
Weight
Model code
*
1
Engine
UPK60L-GKTSKA
UPK60L-GKTLKA
UPK65L-GKTSKA
UPK65L-GKTLKA
USK60L-GKTSKA
USK60L-GKTLKA
USK60L-GKTZKA
USK65L-GKTSKA
USK65L-GKTLKA
USK65L-GKTZKA
USK65L-GKTSGA
USK65L-GKTLGA
USK65L-GKTZGA
4.6L V8
(1UR-FE) engine
5.7L V8
(3UR-FE) engine
5.7L V8
(3UR-FBE) engine
Driving system
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants+luggage)
2WD
TWR
*
(Trailer weight + cargo)
1220 lb. (550 kg)
6900 lb. (3130 kg)
1250 lb. (565 kg)
6800 lb. (3084 kg)
4WD
1245 lb. (560 kg)
6600 lb. (2994 kg)
1270 lb. (575 kg)
1310 lb. (590 kg) 7400 lb. (3357 kg)
2WD
1330 lb. (600 kg) 7300 lb. (3311 kg)
1315 lb. (595 kg)
7200 lb. (3266 kg)
1210 lb. (545 kg)
7100 lb. (3221 kg)
1230 lb. (555 kg)
4WD
1220 lb. (550 kg) 7000 lb. (3175 kg)
1210 lb. (545 kg)
7100 lb. (3221 kg)
1230 lb. (555 kg)
1220 lb. (550 kg)
7000 lb. (3175 kg)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (
6
*
: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.
623
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
624
6-1. Specifications
■
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
4.6 L V8 (1UR-FE) engine
5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine
625
6
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Model
Type
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Drive belt tension
Fuel
Engine
Fuel type
Octane rating
(Unleaded gasoline)
Ethanol percentage
(E85)
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
1UR-FE, 3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE
8-cylinder V-type, 4-cycle, gasoline
4.6 L V8 (1UR-FE) engine
3.70
3.27 in. (94.0
83.0 mm)
5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine
3.70
4.02 in. (94.0
102.0 mm)
4.6 L V8 (1UR-FE) engine
281.2 cu.in. (4608 cm
3
)
5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine
345.4 cu.in. (5663 cm
3
)
Automatic adjustment
Gasoline engine
Unleaded gasoline only
Flex-fuel engine
Unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the two fuels
87 (Research octane number91) or higher
85% or less
26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)
626
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill-reference)
With filter
Without filter
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)
7.4 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
4.6 L V8 (1UR-FE) engine
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
Outside temperature
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
6
627
6-1. Specifications
5.7 L V8 (3UR-FE, 3UR-FBE) engine
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil may be used. However, SAE
0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
628
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
4.6 L V8
(1UR-FE) engine
5.7 L V8
(3UR-FE,
3UR-FBE) engine
Coolant type
15.6 qt. (14.8 L, 13.0 Imp. qt.)
Vehicles without towing package
14.5 qt. (13.7 L, 12.0 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles with towing package
15.4 qt. (14.6 L, 12.8 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO SK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
6
629
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68
F (20
C):
Charging rates
12.6
12.8 V Fully charged
12.2
12.4 V Half charged
11.8
12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off)
5 A max.
Differential
Oil capacity
Front
(4WD models)
Rear
Oil type and viscosity
*
2.17 qt. (2.05 L, 1.80 Imp.qt.)
1.64 qt. (1.55 L, 1.36 Imp.qt.)
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil
LT 75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*
: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is put in your Toyota vehicle at the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
630
6-1. Specifications
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity
*
Fluid type
4.6 L V8
(1UR-FE) engine
5.7 L V8
(3UR-FE,
3UR-FBE) engine
2WD models
11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 Imp.qt.)
4WD models
11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles without towing package
11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles with towing package
12.3 qt. (11.6 L, 10.2 Imp.qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*
:The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■
Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity
Oil type
Recommended oil viscosity
1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)
Gear oil API GL-5
SAE 75W-90
6
631
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance
* 1
Pedal free play
Brake pad wear limit
4.1 in. (104 mm) Min.
0.04
0.20 in. (1
5 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake pedal travel
* 2
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
6 — 9 clicks
Fluid type FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
* 1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) with the engine running.
* 2
: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.1 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
Chassis lubrication (4WD models)
Propeller shafts Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Steering
Free play
Power steering fluid type
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
632
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
P275/65R18 114T,
P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)
Front tires:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear tires:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare tire:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
18
8J
Steel wheels:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)
Type B
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
P275/55R20 111H,
P255/70R18 112T (spare tire)
Front tires:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear tires:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare tire:
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
20
18
8J,
8J (spare wheel)
Steel wheels:
154 ft·lbf (209 N·m, 21.3 kgf·m)
Aluminum wheels:
97 ft·lbf (131 N·m, 13.4 kgf·m)
6
633
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Exterior
Interior
Light Bulbs
Headlights
(high beam)
Headlights
(low beam)
Front fog lights
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal/parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights
Tail lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Outer foot light
Vanity lights
Personal/interior lights
Front
Center
Rear
Interior light
Foot well lighting
Door courtesy lights
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: H10 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
F: Double end bulbs
Bulb No.
9005
—
9145
168
4157NAK
—
7443
194
921
168
—
7065
W
60
21
21/5
3.8
16
5
5
1.4
55
45
5
27/8
—
—
—
7506
—
168
5
5
5
5
1.4
5
Type
A
E
D
D
D
D
D
F
B
C
D
E
D
F
D
D
D
D
634
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Gasoline engine
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
Flex-fuel engine
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline, E85, or a blend of the two fuels.
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher), E85, or a blend of these two fuels is required for optimum engine performance.
The use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
The use of fuel with an ethanol concentration in excess of 85% will have a negative impact on driving performance and can cause damage to the fuel system components.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
At minimum, the E85 you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D5798 in the U.S.A.
6
635
6-1. Specifications
■
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■
If your engine knocks
●
Consult your Toyota dealer.
●
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■
Fuel quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of fuel you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of fuel.
If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■
Gasoline quality standards
●
Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
●
The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●
The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.
■
E85 fuel (Flex-fuel vehicles)
●
E85 fuel is a blend of 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. However, E85 does not necessarily contain 85% ethanol. The ethanol content of E85 is required by ASTM to be between 70% and 85%. For example, in cold climates the ethanol content of E85 may be reduced during the winter months to maintain cold weather starting performance.
●
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to fill your fuel tank more frequently when using E85.
●
The number of fuel stations that sell E85 fuel is limited. For more information about fueling stations, please refer to the U.S. Department of
Energy Web site.
http://www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/
636
6-1. Specifications
■
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●
Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●
All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.
■
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■
Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Gasoline engine)
●
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●
If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
●
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■
Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■
Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline (Flex-fuel engine)
Do not use non-specified fuels such as the following.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels with more than 85% ethanol.
■
Toyota does not recommend the use of after-market fuel additives
(Flex-fuel engine)
Do not use any after-market fuel additives when repeatedly refueling with
E85, as some after-market fuel additives are not compatible with E85.
6
637
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■
Notice on fuel quality
●
Do not use improper fuels.
If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
●
Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●
Gasoline engine: Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
■
When use of non-specified fuels (Flex-fuel engine)
The use of non-specified fuels will have a negative impact on starting and driving performance, and will cause damage to the fuel system components.
Therefore, do not add fuels such as the following.
• Fuels containing methanol
• Fuels with more than 85% ethanol
■
Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■
When refueling
Take care not to spill fuel.
It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
638
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(
(
(
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
6
639
6-1. Specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.
Summer tire or all season tire (
An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
:The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
640
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■
Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■
Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
6
641
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
■
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
642
6-1. Specifications
■
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
6
643
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum inflation pressure
Recommended inflation pressure
Accessory weight
Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factoryinstalled equipment (whether installed or not)
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
644
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Normal occupant weight
Occupant distribution
Production options weight
Rim
Meaning
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1
*
that follows
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1
*
below
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Rim size designation
Rim type designation
Rim width
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Vehicle normal load on the tire
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim diameter and width
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Nominal distance between rim flanges
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1
*
below), and dividing by two
6
645
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Weather side
Bead
Bead separation
Bias ply tire
Carcass
Chunking
Cord
Cord separation
Cracking
CT
Extra load tire
Groove
Innerliner
646
Meaning
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Innerliner separation
Intended outboard sidewall
Light truck (LT) tire
Load rating
Maximum load rating
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
Measuring rim
Open splice
Outer diameter
Overall width
Passenger car tire
Meaning
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less
6
647
6-1. Specifications
Ply
Tire related term
Ply separation
Pneumatic tire
Radial ply tire
Reinforced tire
Section width
Sidewall
Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim
Meaning
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
648
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Tread
Tread rib
Tread separation
Treadwear indicators(TWI)
Meaning
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing
*
:Table 1
Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants
2 through 4
5 through 10
11 through 15
16 through 20
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
2
3
5
7
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 in front
2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
6
649
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Toyota dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Item
Wireless remote control
(
Function Default setting
Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
ON
Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps
Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
Panic function
Buzzer sounds when pushing LOCK with any door not closed
ON
60 seconds
ON
ON
ON
ON
Customized setting
OFF
All doors unlocked in one step
OFF
0 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
650
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless remote control
(
Power back door
(
Door lock
(
Function
Power back door operation
Switch operation
Wireless remote control linked operation
Operation signal volume
Operation when door locks
Time elapsed before back door closing function is activated when pushing switch in the luggage compartment
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Opening driver’s door unlocks all doors.
Shifting gears to “P” unlocks all doors.
Shifting gears to position other than “P” locks all doors.
Default setting
Customized setting
Push twice*
Push and hold
One short push*
Push and hold One short push
ON
OFF
Possible
1.5 seconds
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Impossible
0 seconds
1 seconds
2 seconds
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
6
*: It is possible to select them only when the power back door operation with the open/close switch is made impossible when the door is locked.
651
6-2. Customization
Item
Door lock
(
Power windows
(
Function
Unlocking using a key
Door key linked operation
Default setting
Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps
Customized setting
All doors unlocked in one step
Open and close
Open only
Close only
OFF
Open only
Close only
OFF
Door key linked operation
Open and close
Moon roof
(
Automatic light off system
(
Back window
(
Rear window wiper and washer
(
Linked operation of components when door key is used
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed
Linked back door key operation
Sensitivity of jam protection function
Washer linkage wiper control
Slide only
Level 3
30 seconds
Open and close
Level 1
ON
Drip prevention function ON
Tilt only
Level 1 to 5
0 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Open only
Close only
Level 2 to 4
OFF
OFF
652
6-2. Customization
Item
Illumination
(
Seat Belt
Reminder
Buzzer
(
Function
Time elapsed before lights turn off
Operation after the engine is off
Operation when the doors are unlocked
Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer
Default setting
15 seconds
ON
ON
Customized setting
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
OFF
OFF
ON OFF
653
6
6-2. Customization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
Item
Power back door
When to initialize
• After reconnecting or changing the battery.
• After changing a fuse.
Engine oil maintenance data
After changing engine oil
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.
• When changing the tire size.
Reference
654
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners .............. 656
(in French) ..................... 657
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
(in French) ..................... 660
655
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave,
S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
656
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
657
7
658
659
7
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.
660
661
7
662
663
7
664
665
7
666
667
7
668
669
7
670
Index
Abbreviation list ...................... 672
Alphabetical index................... 674
What to do if............................ 684
For details of equipment related to the navigation system and navigation system screen, refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
671
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
GAWR
GCWR
GVWR
I/M
INFO
LATCH
LED
LT
M + S
MMT
MTBE
OBD
PWR
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
2WD Two Wheel Drive
4WD Four Wheel Drive
ABS
ACC
AI-SHIFT
ALR
Anti-Lock Brake System
Accessory
Artificial Intelligence shifting
Automatic Locking Retractor
A-TRAC
AUTO LSD
AVS
CRS
ECU
EDR
ELR
FFV
Active Traction Control
Automatic Limited Slip Differential
Adaptive Variable Suspension System
Child Restraint System
Electronic Control Unit
Event Data Recorder
Emergency Locking Retractor
Flexible Fuel Vehicle
Gross Axle Weight Rating
Gross Combination Weight Rating
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Emission inspection and maintenance
Information
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Light Emitting Diode
Light truck
Mud + Snow
Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
On Board Diagnostics
Power
672
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
RES
RSCA
Resume
Roll Sensing of Curtain shield Airbags
SRS
TIN
TPMS
TRAC
Supplemental Restraint System
Tire Identification Number
Tire Pressure Warning System
Traction Control
TWI
TWR
VIN
VSC
Treadwear indicators
Trailer Weight Rating
Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Stability Control
673
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A
A/C.....................................280, 288
ABS ...........................................236
Active traction control.............236
Adaptive variable suspension
system ....................................228
Air conditioning filter...............542
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............542
Front air conditioning
system ................................280
Rear air conditioning
system ................................288
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions............................114
Airbag precautions for your
child ....................................118
Airbag warning light...............584
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions............................114
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................118
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........124
General airbag
precautions .........................118
Locations of airbags ..............111
Modification and disposal of
airbags ................................122
Proper driving
posture........................109, 118
Side airbag operating
conditions............................114
Side airbag precautions ........118
SRS airbags ..........................111
Alarm......................................... 106
Antenna .................................... 303
Anti-lock brake system ........... 236
Armrest ..................................... 474
Ashtrays ................................... 460
A-TRAC ..................................... 236
Audio input............................... 343
Audio system
A/V input port ........................ 389
Antenna................................. 303
Audio input ............................ 343
Audio visual input.................. 389
AUX port ............................... 343
CD player/changer ................ 309
DVD player............................ 372
iPod....................................... 326
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 318
Optimal use........................... 339
Portable music player ........... 343
Radio..................................... 301
Rear seat entertainment
system ................................ 364
Steering wheel audio
switch.................................. 345
Type ...................................... 297
USB memory......................... 332
Audio visual input.................... 389
AUTO LSD system ................... 234
Automatic light control
system .................................... 189
Automatic
transmission .......................... 160
AUX port ................................... 343
Auxiliary box ............................ 453
A/V input port ........................... 389
AVS ........................................... 228
674
Alphabetical index
B
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 558
Wattage ................................ 634
Back door
Back door ............................... 42
Wireless remote control.......... 33
Back window .......................... 94
Battery
Checking .............................. 524
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................ 612
Preparing and checking before
winter ................................. 253
Bluetooth
®
audio..................... 348
Bluetooth
®
Bottle holder ............................ 452
Brakes
Fluid...................................... 521
Parking brake ....................... 165
Brake assist ............................. 236
Break-in tips ............................ 149
C
Card holder .............................. 438
Care
Exterior ................................. 498
Interior .................................. 500
Seat belts ............................. 501
Cargo capacity ........................ 247
Cargo hooks ............................ 481
CD changer
CD ........................................ 309
MP3 ...................................... 318
WMA disc ............................. 318
CD player ................................. 309
Chains ...................................... 253
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........129
Booster seats, installation .....140
Convertible seats,
definition .............................129
Convertible seats,
installation...........................139
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........124
Infant seats, definition ...........129
Infant seats, installation.........138
Installing CRS with LATCH
system ................................135
Installing CRS with seat
belts ....................................138
Installing CRS with top
tether straps........................141
Child safety
Airbag precautions ................118
Battery precautions .......525, 614
Child restraint system............129
Child-protectors.......................38
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................77
Installing child restraints........133
Moon roof precautions ............98
Power window lock switch.......92
Power window precautions .....93
Removed key battery
precautions .........................546
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................80
Seat belt precautions ..............77
Seat heater precautions ........471
Child-protectors .........................38
Cigarette lighter .......................461
675
Alphabetical index
Cleaning
Exterior..................................498
Interior ...................................500
Seat belts ..............................501
Climate control seat.................472
Clock ........................................ 457
Coin holder ...............................435
Compass...................................491
Condenser ................................521
Console box .....................436, 443
Conversation mirror ................462
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............615
CRS ...........................................129
Cruise control
Cruise control ........................195
Dynamic radar cruise
control .................................198
Cup holders ..............................448
Curtain shield airbags .............111
Customizable features.............650
D
Daytime running light
system ....................................188
Defogger
Rear window .........................292
Side mirrors...........................292
Dimension.................................622
Dinghy towing ..........................277
Display
Trip information .....................177
Warning message .................592
Do-it-yourself maintenance.....509
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ..............429
Wattage.................................634
Doors
Back door................................ 42
Door glasses ........................... 92
Door lock........................... 33, 37
Side doors............................... 37
Side mirrors............................. 86
Driver's seat belt reminder
light......................................... 585
Driving
Break-in tips .......................... 149
Correct posture ..................... 109
Procedures............................ 148
Winter driving tips ................. 253
Driving position memory .......... 64
DVD player................................ 372
E
Electronically modulated air
suspension ............................ 223
Emergency flashers
Switch ................................... 572
Emergency, in case of
If the engine will not start ...... 608
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted ................................. 610
If the vehicle has discharged
battery................................. 612
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................ 583
If the warning light turns
on........................................ 583
If the warning message is
displayed ............................ 592
If you have a flat tire ............. 597
If you lose your keys ............. 611
If you think something is
wrong.................................. 579
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ................................... 618
676
Alphabetical index
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ......................... 619
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................. 573
If your vehicle overheats ...... 615
Engine
Compartment........................ 514
Engine switch ....................... 157
Hood..................................... 513
How to start the
engine ................................ 157
Identification number ............ 624
If the engine will not start...... 608
Ignition switch ...................... 157
Overheating.......................... 615
Engine coolant
Capacity ............................... 629
Checking .............................. 519
Preparing and checking before
winter ................................. 253
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ..................................... 167
Engine immobilizer system.... 104
Engine oil
Capacity ............................... 627
Checking .............................. 515
Preparing and checking before
winter ................................. 253
Engine switch .......................... 157
Event data recorder ................ 581
F
FFV ......................................99, 635
Flex-fuel ..............................99, 635
Flexible fuel vehicle ...........99, 635
Floor mat...................................478
Fluid
Brake.....................................521
Washer..................................527
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Switch....................................190
Wattage.................................634
Four-wheel drive system.........229
Front air conditioning
system ....................................280
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............124
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light.........................586
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................50
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Switch....................................186
Wattage.................................634
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Wattage.................................634
Fuel
Capacity ................................626
Fuel gauge ............................167
Fuel pump shut off system ....580
Gas station information .........688
Information ............................635
Refueling .................................99
Type ......................................626
Fuel filler door ............................99
Fuel pump shut off system .....580
Fuses.........................................547
677
Alphabetical index
G
Garage door opener.................485
Gas station information...........688
Gauges......................................167
Glove box..................................434
H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ................406
Hazard lights
Switch....................................572
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................67
Headlight cleaner .....................194
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Switch....................................186
Wattage.................................634
Heaters
Seat heaters..................469, 472
Side mirror.............................292
Height control
Electronically modulated air
suspension..........................223
Hood..........................................513
Hooks
Cargo net ..............................481
Shopping bag ........................482
Horn...........................................166
I
I/M test.......................................508
Identification
Engine ...................................625
Vehicle ..................................624
Ignition switch..........................157
Illuminated entry system.........429
Indicator lights .........................172
Initialization
Items to initialize....................654
Inside rear view mirror ..............83
Interior lights
Interior lights ......................... 429
Switch ................................... 430
Wattage................................. 634
Instrument panel light
control .................................... 171
Intuitive parking assist............ 209
J
Jack
Positioning the jack ............... 600
Vehicle-equipped jack........... 597
Jack handle .............................. 597
K
Keyless entry ............................. 33
Keys
Engine switch........................ 157
If you lose your keys ............. 611
Ignition switch ....................... 157
Keyless entry .......................... 33
Key number............................. 32
Keys ........................................ 32
Wireless remote control
key ........................................ 33
L
LATCH system ......................... 135
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 558
Wattage................................. 634
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................. 558
Wattage................................. 634
678
Alphabetical index
Lights
Door courtesy lights.............. 429
Emergency flasher switch .... 572
Fog light switch..................... 190
Hazard light switch ............... 572
Headlight switch ................... 186
Interior light switch........ 431, 432
Outer foot lights .................... 429
Personal light switch............. 431
Replacing light bulbs ............ 558
Turn signal lever................... 164
Vanity lights .......................... 456
Wattage ................................ 634
Load capacity .......................... 251
Lock steering column ............. 158
Luggage compartment
features.................................. 480
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance ...................... 509
General maintenance ........... 505
Maintenance data................. 622
Maintenance requirements... 503
Map holder ............................... 439
Meter
Accessory meter................... 183
Instrument panel light
control ................................ 171
Meters .................................. 167
Mirrors
Conversation mirror.............. 462
Inside rear view mirror............ 83
Side mirror heaters............... 292
Side mirrors ............................ 86
Vanity mirrors ....................... 456
Moon roof................................... 96
MP3 disc................................... 318
Multi-information
display ................................... 177
N
Noise from under vehicle ..........26
O
Odometer ..................................167
Off-road precautions ...............242
Oil
Engine oil ..............................515
Opener
Back door ................................42
Fuel filler door .........................99
Hood......................................513
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............86
Outside temperature
display ....................................458
Overhead console....................446
Overheating, Engine ................615
P
Parking assist...........................209
Parking brake ...........................165
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Switch....................................186
Wattage.................................634
Pen holder ................................441
Personal lights
Switch....................................431
Wattage.................................634
Power back door ........................43
Power back window...................94
Power outlet .............................463
Power windows ..........................92
679
Alphabetical index
R
Radar cruise control ................198
Radiator ....................................521
Radio .........................................301
Rear air conditioning
system ....................................288
Rear console box .....................443
Rear seat
Adjustment ..............................54
Folding down second
seatback ...............................58
Folding down third
seatback ...............................60
Rear seat entertainment
system ....................................364
Rear seat entertainment
system controller battery......369
Rear side sunshade .................475
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Wattage.................................634
Rear view mirror
Anti-glare...........................83, 88
Compass ...............................491
Rear view monitor system ......216
Rear window defogger ............292
Rear window wiper ..................193
Replacing
Fuses ....................................547
Key battery ............................545
Light bulbs.............................558
Tires ......................................597
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners ........................656
Roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off switch.......123
Roof luggage carrier..................90
S
Seatback table....................52, 477
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt............. 71
ALR ......................................... 76
Automatic Locking
Retractor............................... 76
Child restraint system
installation........................... 133
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ...................... 501
Comfort guide ......................... 74
ELR ......................................... 76
Emergency Locking
Retractor............................... 76
How to wear your seat belt ..... 71
How your child should wear
the seat belt .......................... 77
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use ................................. 76
Reminder light....................... 585
Seat belt extenders ................. 77
Seat belt pretensioners ........... 75
Seat heaters ............................. 469
Seating capacity ...................... 251
Seats
Adjustment ........................ 50, 54
Adjustment precaution ...... 53, 63
Child seats/child restraint
system installation .............. 133
Cleaning................................ 500
Climate control seat .............. 472
Driver’s seat position
memory................................. 64
Head restraint ......................... 67
Properly sitting in the seat..... 109
Seat heaters.................. 469, 472
Seat heaters and
ventilators ........................... 472
680
Alphabetical index
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 172
Shift lever
Automatic
transmission....................... 160
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted ........................... 610
Shift lock system..................... 610
Shopping bag hooks............... 482
Side airbags............................. 111
Side marker lights
Replacing ............................. 558
Switch................................... 186
Wattage ................................ 634
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding .............. 86
Spare tire
Inflation pressure.................. 633
Storage location ................... 597
Spark plug................................ 629
Specifications.......................... 622
Speedometer ........................... 167
Steering
Column lock release............. 158
Steering wheel
Adjustment ....................... 81, 82
Audio switches ..................... 345
Climate remote control
switches ............................. 295
Steering wheel memory.......... 64
Telephone switches.............. 404
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 558
Wattage ................................ 634
Storage feature........................ 433
Storage precautions ............... 249
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................618
Sun visors.................................455
Sunshade..................................475
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .....572
Engine switch ........................157
Fog light switch .....................190
Hazard light switch ................572
Ignition switch........................157
Light switches........................186
Power back door switch ....33, 43
Power back window switch .....94
Power door lock switch ...........37
Power window switch ..............92
Rear window wiper and
washer switch .....................193
Seatback folding/returning
switch..............................57, 62
Window lock switch .................92
Wiper and washer
switch..........................191, 193
681
Alphabetical index
T
Tachometer...............................167
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs .............558
Switch....................................186
Wattage.................................634
Talk switch................................404
Telephone switch.....................404
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.....................................106
Engine immobilizer system ...104
Tire inflation pressure .............536
Tire information
Glossary ................................644
Size .......................................641
Tire identification number......640
Uniform tire quality
grading................................642
Tires
Chains ...................................254
Checking ...............................529
If you have a flat tire..............597
Inflation pressure...........536, 633
Information ............................639
Replacing ..............................597
Rotating tires .........................529
Size .......................................633
Snow tires .............................253
Tire pressure warning
system ........................529, 586
Tissue pocket ...........................442
Tools .........................................597
Total load capacity...................251
Towing
Dinghy towing........................277
Emergency towing.................573
Trailer towing.........................257
Trailer weight rating.......259, 623
Traction control........................236
TRAC .........................................236
Trip information .......................177
Trip meter .................................167
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 558
Switch ................................... 164
Wattage................................. 634
V
Valet key ..................................... 32
Vanity lights
Vanity lights........................... 456
Wattage................................. 634
Vanity mirrors .......................... 456
Vehicle identification
number ................................... 624
Vehicle stability control .......... 236
VSC ........................................... 236
W
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................ 583
Open door ............................. 585
Seat belt reminder................. 585
Warning lights
ABS....................................... 584
Airbag system ....................... 584
Anti-lock brake system.......... 584
Brake assist system .............. 584
Brake system ........................ 583
Charging system ................... 583
Electronic engine control
system ................................ 584
Malfunction indicator lamp .... 584
Master warning light.............. 587
Open door ............................. 585
Pretensioners........................ 584
Seat belt reminder light ......... 585
SRS airbags.......................... 584
Tire pressure warning light.... 586
Warning messages .................. 592
Washer
Checking ............................... 527
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 253
Switch ........................... 191, 193
Washing and waxing ............... 498
682
Weight
Cargo capacity ..................... 247
Load limits ............................ 251
Towing capacity.................... 623
Trailer Weight Rating.... 262, 623
TWR ............................. 262, 623
Vehicle capacity weight ........ 623
Weight .................................. 623
Wheels...................................... 540
Window glasses ................. 92, 94
Window lock switch .................. 92
Windows
Power back window................ 94
Power windows ...................... 92
Rear window defogger ......... 292
Washer ......................... 191, 193
Windshield wiper de-icer........ 294
Windshield wipers................... 191
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ........... 545
Wireless remote control.......... 33
WMA disc ................................. 318
Alphabetical index
683
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
The shift lever cannot be moved out
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone
If the engine will not start
Engine immobilizer system
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming from under the hood
The key is lost
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
The doors cannot be locked
If the vehicle battery is discharged
Side doors
Back door
Alarm
The horn begins to sound.
The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand
684
If the vehicle becomes stuck
What to do if...
The warning light or indicator light comes on
If a warning light turns on
■
Instrument cluster
Vehicles with multi-information display
Vehicles without multi-information display
■
Center panel
685
What to do if...
■
Warning lights
or
Brake system warning light
Charging system warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
ABS warning light or
Engine oil replacement reminder light
SRS warning light
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
Low washer fluid warning light
Power steering warning light
and
Master warning light
VSC OFF indicator and slip indicator*
Tire pressure warning light
Open door warning light
Low fuel level warning light
Driver’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
*: VSC OFF indicator flashes and slip indicator comes on.
The warning message is displayed
If a warning message is displayed
686
Memo
687
688
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
Fuel filler door
Hood lock release lever
Tire inflation pressure
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation pressure
26.4 gal. (100.0 L, 22.0 lmp.gal.)
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill-reference)
With filter
Without filter
Engine oil type
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
7.9 (7.5, 6.6)
7.4 (7.1, 6.2)
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 184 Headlight switch
- 188 Fog light switch
- 189 washer
- 192 Headlight cleaner switch
- 193 Cruise control
- 196 control
- 207 Intuitive parking assist
- 221 air suspension
- 226 Suspension System)
- 227 Four-wheel drive system
- 232 AUTO LSD system
- 234 Driving assist systems
- 240 Off-road precautions
- 245 Cargo and luggage
- 249 Vehicle load limits
- 251 Winter driving tips
- 255 Trailer towing
- 275 Dinghy towing
- 278 system
- 290 defoggers
- 292 Windshield wiper de-icer
- 293 switches
- 295 Audio system
- 299 Using the radio
- 307 Using the CD player
- 316 WMA discs
- 324 Operating an iPod
- 330 Operating a USB memory
- 337 system
- 341 Using the AUX port
- 343 audio switches
- 278 audio system
- 281 system
- 286 enabled portable player
- 293 setup
- 294 system
- 302 (DVD video)
- 311 (video CD)
- 314 (audio CD/CD text)
- 316 (MP3 discs)
- 319 Using the video mode
- 321 settings
- 329 features
- 333 system
- 342 Making a phone call
- 346 Setting a cellular phone
- 350 setup
- 353 Using the phone book
- 359 Interior lights list
- 361 • Personal/interior lights
- 362 • Interior light
- 363 List of storage features
- 364 • Glove boxes
- 365 • Coin holder
- 366 • Front console box
- 368 • Card holder
- 369 • Map holder
- 371 • Pen holder
- 372 • Tissue pocket
- 373 • Rear console box
- 376 • Overhead console
- 378 • Cup holders
- 382 • Bottle holders
- 383 • Auxiliary boxes
- 385 Sun visors
- 386 Vanity mirrors
- 387 Clock
- 388 display
- 390 Portable ashtray
- 391 Cigarette lighter
- 392 Conversation mirror
- 393 Power outlets
- 399 Seat heaters
- 402 ventilators
- 404 Armrests
- 405 Rear side sunshades
- 407 Seatback table
- 408 Floor mat
- 479 features
- 484 Garage door opener
- 490 Compass
- 497 the vehicle exterior
- 499 the vehicle interior
- 502 requirements
- 504 General maintenance
- 507 programs
- 508 precautions
- 513 Engine compartment
- 528 Tires
- 535 Tire inflation pressure
- 539 Wheels
- 541 Air conditioning filter
- 544 battery
- 546 fuses
- 557 Light bulbs
- 571 Emergency flashers
- 572 to be towed
- 578 wrong
- 579 system
- 580 Event data recorder
- 582 sounds
- 591 display)
- 596 If you have a flat tire
- 607 If the engine will not start
- 609 shifted from P
- 610 If you lose your keys
- 611 discharged
- 614 If your vehicle overheats
- 617 stuck
- 618 an emergency
- 621 (fuel, oil level, etc.)
- 634 Fuel information
- 638 Tire information
- 649 Customizable features
- 653 Items to initialize
- 655 for U.S. owners
- 656 (in French)
- 671 Abbreviation list
- 673 Alphabetical index
- 683 What to do if